Marantz SR5004 user guide

Download

AV Surround Receiver

SR6004

ENGLISHFRANÇAISDEUTSCHNEDERLANDSESPAÑOLITALIANOSVENSKA

SR5004

ENGLISH

WARRANTY

For warranty information, contact your local Marantz distributor.

RETAIN YOUR PURCHASE RECEIPT

Your purchase receipt is your permanent record of a valuable purchase. It should be kept in a safe place to be referred to as necessary for insurance purposes or when corresponding with Marantz.

IMPORTANT

When seeking warranty service, it is the responsibility of the consumer to establish proof and date of purchase. Your purchase receipt or invoice is adequate for such proof.

FOR U.K. ONLY

This undertaking is in addition to a consumer's statutory rights and does not affect those rights in any way.

FRANÇAIS

GARANTIE

Pour des informations sur la garantie, contacter le distributeur local Marantz.

CONSERVER L'ATTESTATION D'ACHAT

L'attestation d'achat est la preuve permanente d'un achat de valeur. La conserver en lieu sur pour s'y reporter aux fins d'obtention d'une couverture d'assurance ou dans le cadre de correspondances avec Marantz.

IMPORTANT

Pour l'obtention d'un service couvert par la garantie, il incombe au client d'établir la preuve de l'achat et d'en corroborer la date. Le reçu ou la facture constituent des preuves sufﬁ santes.

DEUTSCH

GARANTIE

Bei Garantiefragen wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihren Marantz-Händler.

HEBEN SIE IHRE QUITTING GUT AUF

Die Quittung dient Ihnen als bleibende Unterlage für Ihren wertvollen Einkauf Das Aufbewahren der Quittung ist wichtig, da die darin enthaltenen Angaben für Versicherungswecke oder bei Korrespondenz mit Marantz angeführt werden müssen.

WICHTIG!

Bei Garantiefragen muß der Kunde eine Kaufunterlage mit Kaufdatum vorlegen. Ihren Quittung oder Rechnung ist als Unterlage ausreichend.

NEDERLANDS

GARANTIE

Voor inlichtingen omtrent garantie dient u zich tot uw plaatselijke Marantz dealer te wenden.

UW KWITANTIE, KASSABON E.D. BEWAREN

Uw kwitantie, kassabon e.d. vormen uw bewijs van aankoop van een waardevol artikel en dienen op een veilige plaats bewaard te worden voor evt, verwijzing bijv. in verbend met verzekering of bij correspondentie met Marantz.

BELANGRIJK

Bij een evt, beroep op de garantie is het de verantwoordelijkheid van de consument een gedateerd bewijs van aankoop te tonen. Uw kassabon of factuurzijn voldoende bewijs.

ESPAÑOL

GARANTIA

Para obtener información acerca de la garantia póngase en contacto con su distribuidor Marantz.

GUARDE SU RECIBO DE COMPRA

Su recibo de compra es su prueba permanente de haber adquirido un aparato de valor, Este recibo deberá guardarlo en un lugar seguro y utilizarlo como referencia cuando tenga que hacer uso del seguro o se ponga en contacto con Marantz.

IMPORTANTE

Cuando solicite el servicio otorgado por la garantia el usuario tiene la responsabilidad de demonstrar cuándo efectuó la compra. En este caso, su recibo de compra será la prueba apropiada.

ITALIANO

GARANZIA

L’apparecchio è coperto da una garanzia di buon funzionamento della durata di un anno, o del periodo previsto dalla legge, a partire dalla data di acquisto comprovata da un documento attestante il nominativo del Rivenditore e la data di vendita. La garanzia sarà prestata con la sostituzione o la riparazione gratuita delle parti difettose. Non sono coperti da garanzia difetti derivanti da uso improprio, errata installazione, manutenzione effettuata da personale non autorizzato o, comunque, da circostanze che non possano riferirsi a difetti di funzionamento dell’apparecchio. Sono inoltre esclusi dalla garanzia gli interventi inerenti l’installazione e l’allacciamento agli impianti di alimentazione. Gli apparecchi verranno riparati presso i nostri Centri di Assistenza Autorizzati. Le spese ed i rischi di trasporto sono a carico del cliente. La casa costruttrice declina ogni responsabilità per danni diretti o indiretti provocati dalla inosservanza delle prescrizioni di installazione, uso e manutenzione dettagliate nel presente manuale o per guasti dovuti ad uso continuato a ﬁ ni professionali.

SVENSKA

GARANTI

För information om garantin, kontakta Marantz lokalagent.

SPAR KVITTOT

Kvittot är ett inköpsbevis på en värdefull vara. Det skall förvaras säkert och hänvisas till vid försäkringsfall eller vidkorrespondens mod Marantz.

VIKTIGT

Fö att garantin skall gälla är det kundens sak att framställa bevis och datum om köpet. Kvitto eller faktura är tillräokligt bevis fö detta.

CE MARKING

English

Le SR6004/SR5004 est conforme à la

Das Modell SR6004/SR5004

El SR6004/SR5004 está de acuerdo con

Il SR6004/SR5004 è conforme alle

SR6004/SR5004 är tillverkad i enlighet

The SR6004/SR5004 is in conformity with the EMC directive and lowvoltage directive.

Français

directive EMC et à la directive sur les basses tensions.

Deutsch

entspricht den EMC-Richtlinien und den Richtlinien für Niederspannungsgeräte.

Nederlands

De SR6004/SR5004 voldoet aan de EMC eisen en de vereisten voor laag-voltage.

Español

las normas EMC y las relacionadas con baja tensión.

Italiano

direttive CEE ed a quelle per i bassi voltaggi.

Svenska

med EMC direktiven och direktiven för lågvoltsutrusning.

English

WARNINGS

- Do not expose the equipment to rain, moisture, dripping or splashing.

- Do not remove the cover from the equipment.

- Do not insert anything into the equipment through the ventilation holes.

- Do not handle the mains cord with wet hands.

- Do not cover the ventilation with any items such as tablecloths, newspapers, curtains, etc.

- No naked flame sources, such as lighted candles, should be placed on the equipment.

- No objects ﬁ lled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the equipment.

- When the switch is in the OFF position, the equipment is not completely switched off from MAINS.

- The equipment shall be installed near the power supply so that the power supply is easily accessible.

- Do not expose the unit to excessive heat such as direct sunlight, ﬁ re or the like.

Français

AVERTISSEMENTS

- Ne pas exposer l’appareil à la pluie, à l’humidité, à l’égouttement ou aux éclaboussures.

- Ne pas essayer de retirer le boîtier de l’appareil.

- Ne rien insérer dans l’appareil par les oriﬁ ces de ventilation.

- Ne pas manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec les mains mouillées.

- Ne pas recouvrir les ouïes de ventilation avec un objet quelconque comme une nappe, un journal, un rideau, etc.

- Ne placer aucune source de flamme nue, comme une bougie allumée, sur l'appareil.

- Aucun objet rempli de liquide, un vase par exemple, ne doit être placé sur l'appareil.

- Lorsque l'interrupteur est sur la position OFF, l'appareil n'est pas complètement déconnecté du SECTEUR (MAINS).

- L'appareil sera installé près de la source d'alimentation, de sorte que cette dernière soit facilement accessible.

- Ne pas exposer l’appareil à une chaleur excessive, comme celle des rayons directs du soleil, d’un feu, etc.

Deutsch

WARNHINWEISE

- Das Gerät nicht Regen, Feuchtigkeit, Tropfoder Spritzwasser aussetzen.

- Die Abdeckung nicht vom Gerät abnehmen.

- Keine Gegenstände durch die Belüftungsschlitze stecken.

- Das Netzkabel nicht mit feuchten oder nassen Händen anfassen.

- Decken Sie die Lüftungsöffnungen nicht mit einem Tischtuch, einer Zeitung, einem Vorhang usw. ab.

- Es dürfen keine Gegenstände mit offener Flamme, wie etwa brennende Kerzen, auf dem Gerät aufgestellt werden.

- Auf das Gerät dürfen keine mit Flüssigkeiten gefüllte Behälter, wie etwa eine Vase, gestellt werden.

- Wenn der Schalter ausgeschaltet ist (OFFPosition), ist das Gerät nicht vollständig vom Stromnetz (MAINS) abgetrennt.

- Das Gerät sollte in der Nähe einer Netzsteckdose aufgestellt werden, damit es leicht an das Stromnetz angeschlossen werden kann.

- Setzen Sie das Gerät keiner übermäßigen Wärme aus, z.B. durch Aufstellung in direkter Sonneneinstrahlung, in der Nähe eines offenen Feuers usw.

Nederlands

WAARSCHUWINGEN

- Stel het apparaat niet bloot aan regen, vocht, druppels of spetters.

- Verwijder de afdekplaat van het apparaat niet.

- Duw niets door de ventilatieopeningen in het apparaat.

- Raak het netsnoer niet met natte handen aan.

- Bedek de ventilatieopeningen niet met enige voorwerpen, zoals tafelkleden, kranten, gordijnen, enz.

- Plaats geen brandende voorwerpen, zoals kaarsen, op het apparaat.

- Plaats geen voorwerpen met een vloeistof erin, zoals een bloemenvaas, op het apparaat.

- Als de schakelaar op OFF staat, is het apparaat niet volledig losgekoppeld van de netspanning (MAINS).

- De apparatuur wordt in de buurt van het stopcontact geïnstalleerd, zodat dit altijd gemakkelijk toegankelijk is.

- Stel het apparaat niet bloot aan grote warmte, zoals direct zonlicht, vuur en dergelijke.

Español

ADVERTENCIAS

- No exponga el equipo a la lluvia, la humedad, goteos o salpicaduras.

- No extraiga la tapa del equipo.

- No introduzca nada en el interior del equipo a través de los oriﬁ cios de ventilación.

- No maneje el cable de alimentación con las manos mojadas.

- No cubra la ventilación con objetos como manteles, periódicos, cortinas, etc.

- No deben colocarse sobre el equipo elementos con fuego, por ejemplo velas encendidas.

- No se deben colocar sobre el aparato recipientes que contengan líquidos, como por ejemplo jarrones.

- Cuando el interruptor está en la posición OFF, el equipo no está completamente desconectado de la alimentación MAINS.

- El equipo se instalará cerca de la fuente de alimentación de manera que resulte fácil acceder a ella.

- No exponga la unidad a un calor excesivo, como el derivado de la luz directa del sol, el fuego, o similar.

Italiano

AVVERTENZE

- Non esporre l’apparecchio alla pioggia, all’umidità, al gocciolamento o agli spruzzi.

- Non rimuovere il coperchio dell’apparecchio.

Non introdurre oggetti all’interno dell’apparecchio attraverso i fori di ventilazione.

- Non toccare il cavo di alimentazione con le mani bagnate.

- Non coprire le fessure di ventilazione con tovaglie, giornali, tende od oggetti analoghi.

- Non posare sull'apparecchio sorgenti di ﬁ amme scoperte quali candele accese.

- Non mettere sull'apparecchiatura alcun contenitore di liquido, come ad esempio dei vasi.

- Quando l'interruttore è nella posizione OFF, l'apparecchiatura non è completamente scollegata da MAINS.

- L’apparecchio va installato in prossimità della fonte di alimentazione, in modo che quest’ultima sia facilmente accessibile.

- Non esporre l’unità ad eccessivo calore come la luce diretta del sole, il fuoco o simili.

Svenska

VARNINGAR

- Utsätt inte utrustningen för regn, fukt, droppande vatten eller vattenstänk.

- Ta inte bort utrustningens hölje.

- För inte in föremål i utrustningen genom ventilationshålen.

- Hantera inte nätsladden med våta händer.

- Täck inte för ventilationsöppningarna med några föremål som till exempel bordsdukar, dagstidningar, gardiner e.d.

- Inga föremål med öppen låga, som till exempel tända stearinljus, bör placeras på utrustningen.

- Inga objekt som är fyllda med någon vätska, till exempel blomstervaser, bör placeras på apparaten.

- Även om strömbrytaren står i det avstängda läget OFF, så är utrustningen inte helt bortkopplad från det elektriska nätet (MAINS).

- Utrustningen ska vara installerad nära strömuttaget så att strömförsörjningen är lätt att tillgå.

- Utsätt inte enheten för kraftig värme, såsom direkt solljus, eld eller liknande.

AMPRC_090130N1

A NOTE ABOUT RECYCLING

This product’s packaging materials are recyclable and can be reused. This product and the accessories packed together are the applicable product to the WEEE directive except batteries. Please dispose of any materials in accordance with your local recycling regulations. When discarding the unit, comply with your local rules or regulations.

ENGLISH

Batteries should never be thrown away or incinerated but disposed of in accordance with your local regulations concerning chemical wastes.

REMARQUE CONCERNANT LE RECYCLAGE

Le matériel d’emballage de cet appareil est recyclable et peut être réutilisé. Cet appareil et les accessoires qui sont emballés avec celui-ci sont conformes, à l’exception des piles, à la directive DEEE (relative aux déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques). Jetez ce matériel conformément aux réglementations de recyclage locales. Pour mettre l’appareil au rebut, respectez les règles ou réglementations locales.

FRANÇAIS

Les piles ne doivent jamais être jetées ou incinérées, mais être mises au rebut conformément aux réglementations locales concernant les déchets chimiques.

RECYCLING-HINWEIS

Das Verpackungsmaterial dieses Produkts ist für Recycling geeignet und kann wiederverwendet werden. Dieses Produkt und das in seinem Verpackungskarton enthaltene Zubehör mit Ausnahme der Batterien entsprechen der WEEE-Direktive. Bitte beachten Sie bei der Entsorgung irgendwelcher Materialien die örtlichen Recycling-Bestimmungen. Bei der Entsorgung des Gerätes sind die einschlägigen Umweltschutzauﬂ agen sorgfältig zu befolgen.

DEUTSCH

Batterien dürfen nicht weggeworfen oder verbrannt werden, sondern müssen gemäß den örtlichen Vorschriften zur Entsorgung von chemischem Abfall entsorgt werden.

RECYCLING VAN APPARATUUR EN VERPAKKINGSMATERIAAL

De verpakking van dit product is geschikt voor recycling. Dit product en de accessoires, als geheel verpakt, zijn het relevante product volgens de WEEE-richtlijn, behalve de batterijen. Gooi materialen bij het afval volgens de gemeentelijke voorschriften voor recycling. Gooi dit apparaat bij het afval volgens de gemeentelijke wetten of voorschriften. Batterijen mogen nooit bij het normale afval en mogen nooit worden verbrand, maar moeten worden

NEDERLANDS

weggegooid volgens de gemeentelijke voorschriften voor chemisch afval.

NOTA SOBRE EL RECICLADO

Los materiales de embalaje de este producto son reciclables y pueden ser reutilizados. En este producto y sus accesorios incluidos es aplicable la directiva europea sobre residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos (RAEE), excepto en lo referente a las pilas. Se ruega eliminar cualquiera de esos materiales de acuerdo con las normas locales de reciclado. Cuando deseche esta unidad, cumpla con las normas o reglamentaciones locales.

ESPAÑOL

Las pilas no deben tirarse ni incinerarse, sino que deben eliminarse de acuerdo con las normas locales sobre residuos químicos.

NOTA SUL RICICLAGGIO

I materiali di imballaggio di questo prodotto sono riciclabili e possono essere riutilizzati. Questo prodotto e gli accessori in dotazione con esso, eccettuate le batterie, rappresentano il prodotto applicabile per la direttiva RAEE (riﬁ uti di apparecchiature elettriche ed elettroniche). Smaltirli seguendo le proprie normative locali sul riciclaggio. Quando si desidera eliminare l’apparecchio, attenersi alle indicazioni e alle normative locali.

ITALIANO

Non gettare via le batterie e non bruciarle, ma smaltirle in conformità alle normative locali relative ai riﬁ uti chimici.

OM ÅTERVINNING

Den här produktens förpackningsmaterial är återvinningsbart och kan återanvändas. Den här produkten och de med produkten levererade tillbehören, förutom batterierna, överensstämmer med WEEE-direktivet. Kassera allt material i enlighet med lokala miljöföreskrifter. När enheten ska kasseras ska du följa lokala miljöföreskrifter.

SVENSKA

Batterier får aldrig slängas i hushållsavfall eller brännas. Dom ska hanteras i enlighet med lokala miljöföreskrifter för kemiskt avfall.

INFORMATION FOR USERS ON COLLECTION AND DISPOSAL OF OLD EQUIPMENT AND USED BATTERIES

When discarding the unit, comply with local rules or regulations. Batteries should never be thrown away or incinerated but disposed of in accordance with the local

ENGLISH

regulations concerning battery disposal.

INFORMATION CONCERNANT LA COLLECTE ET LE TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES ET DES DÉCHETS D’ÉQUIPEMENTS ÉLECTRIQUES ET ÉLECTRONIQUES

Lorsque vous mettez cet appareil au rebut, respectez les lois ou réglementations en vigueur. Les piles ne doivent jamais être jetées ou incinérées, mais mises au rebut conformément aux lois en vigueur

FRANÇAIS

sur la mise au rebut des piles.

VERBRAUCHERINFORMATION ZUR SAMMLUNG UND ENTSORGUNG ALTER ELEKTROGERÄTE UND BENUTZTER BATTERIEN

Beachten Sie bei der Entsorgung des Gerätes die örtlichen Vorschriften und Bestimmungen. Die Batterien dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll geworfen oder verbrannt werden; bitte entsorgen Sie die Batterien

DEUTSCH

gemäß der örtlichen Vorschriften.

INFORMATIE VOOR GEBRUIKERS VAN INZAMELING EN VERWIJDERING VAN OUDE APPARATEN EN GEBRUIKTE BATTERIJEN

Volg voor het wegdoen van de speler de voorschriften voor de verwijdering van wit- en bruingoed op. Batterijen mogen nooit worden weggegooid of verbrand, maar moeten volgens de plaatselijke voorschriften betreffende chemisch afval worden verwijderd.

NEDERLANDS

INFORMACIÓN PARA USUARIOS SOBRE RECOLECCIÓN Y DISPOSICIÓN DE EQUIPAMIENTO VIEJO Y BATERÍAS USADAS

Cuando se deshaga de la unidad, cumpla con las reglas o reglamentos locales. Las pilas nunca deberán tirarse ni incinerarse. Deberá disponer de ellas siguiendo los reglamentos de su

ESPAÑOL

localidad relacionados con los desperdicios químicos.

INFORMAZIONI PER GLI UTENTI SULLA RACCOLTA E LO SMALTIMENTO DI VECCHIA ATTREZZATURA E BATTERIE USATE

Per lo smaltimento dell’unità, osservare le normative o le leggi locali in vigore.

ITALIANO

Non gettare le batterie, né incenerirle, ma smaltirle conformemente alla normativa locale sui riﬁuti chimici.

ANVÄNDARINFORMATION, BETRÄFFANDE INSAMLING OCH DUMPNING AV GAMMAL UTRUSTNING OCH ANVÄNDA BATTERIER

När du kasserar enheten ska du göra det i överensstämmelse med lokala regler och bestämmelser. Batterier får absolut inte kastas i soporna eller brännas. Kassera dem enligt lokala bestämmelser för kemiskt

SVENSKA

avfall.

Thank you for choosing the Marantz product. Please read this User Guide thoroughly to ensure proper operation and installation before using this product. After reading this User Guide, be sure to keep this for your future reference.

ACCESSORIES CHECK

Before use, check the below accessories were included in the package.

• Remote controller ..............................................1

RC007SR (SR6004 only) RC008SR (SR5004 only)

• AAA-size batteries .............................................2

• AC power cable ..................................................1

• AM loop antenna ................................................1

• FM antenna ........................................................ 1

• Microphone ........................................................1

• Wireless receiver RX101 (SR6004 only) ............ 1

• User guide ..........................................................1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

FEATURES ........................................................2

BEFORE USE ....................................................3

EQUIPMENT MAINS WORKING SETTING .............. 3

DO NOT LOCATE IN THE FOLLOWING PLACES ...... 3

OPENING AND CLOSING THE FRONT PANEL DOOR

(SR6004 ONLY) ............................................................... 3

USAGE OF REMOTE CONTROLLER ........................... 3

NAMES AND FUNCTION ..............................4

FRONT PANEL ................................................................ 4

FL DISPLAY AND INDICATOR ..................................... 5

REMOTE CONTROLLER ................................................ 6

REAR PANEL .................................................................. 9

BASIC CONNECTIONS ................................10

SPEAKER PLACEMENT ............................................. 10

CONNECTING SPEAKERS ......................................... 11

CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS ................... 12

CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS ....................13

CONNECTING HDMI COMPONENTS .....................14

CONNECTING THE ANTENNAS ............................... 15

CONNECTING THE AC POWER CABLE ..................15

BASIC OPERATION .....................................16

AMP OPERATION ........................................................ 16

TUNER OPERATION .................................................... 17

REMOTE CONTROLLER OPERATION ...................... 18

ADVANCED CONNECTIONS ....................... 19

CONNECTING THE USB MEDIA/iPod (SR6004 ONLY)

CONNECTING THE WIRELESS RECEIVER ............. 19

CONNECTING FOR SPEAKER C USE

(BI-AMP CONNECTION) ............................................ 19

CONNECTING MULTI CHANNEL AUDIO

COMPONENTS ............................................................ 20

CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL POWER AMPLIFIER

CONNECTING FOR ANOTHER ZONE ...................... 21

CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS ... 22

CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT ........................ 22

... 19

.. 20

SETUP ............................................................. 23

GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE (GUI) MENU SYSTEM

1 INPUT SETUP ......................................................... 24

2 SPEAKER SETUP ..................................................... 26

ERROR MESSAGES .................................................... 29

3 SURROUND SETUP ............................................... 32

4 VIDEO SETUP ..........................................................34

5 PREFERENCE .......................................................... 35

6 ACOUSTIC EQ .........................................................37

... 23

ADVANCED OPERATION ............................. 39

AMP OPERATION ........................................................ 39

TUNER OPERATION (PRESET MEMORY) ............... 44

TUNER OPERATION (RDS) ........................................ 46

USB OPERATION (SR6004 ONLY) .............................47

iPod OPERATION (SR6004 ONLY) ............................. 50

OTHERS (USB / iPod).................................................. 53

ZONE SYSTEM .............................................................55

REMOTE CONTROLLER OPERATION ...................... 56

SR6004 REMOTE CONTROLLER BASIC OPERATION

SR6004 REMOTE CONTROLLER MACRO MODE ... 62

SR5004 REMOTE CONTROLLER BASIC OPERATION

.. 59

.. 66

ENGLISH

TROUBLESHOOTING....................................68

GENERAL ...................................................................... 68

SURROUND .................................................................. 69

VIDEO ............................................................................ 70

HDMI ............................................................................. 70

TUNER ........................................................................... 71

USB (SR6004 ONLY) .................................................... 71

FRONT KEY (BUTTON) LOCK OF THE UNIT ........... 72

GENERAL MALFUNCTION ........................................ 72

OTHERS ..........................................................73

SURROUND MODE .....................................................73

DESCRIPTION .............................................................. 76

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .................................. 79

CLEANING OF EQUIPMENT EXTERNAL SURFACES

REPAIRS ........................................................................ 80

.... 80

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

ENGLISH

FEATURES

Dolby Pro Logic IIz

This unit comes with a Dolby Pro Logic IIz decoder, which has the dimension of vertical expressiveness

CONNECTIONS

added to the existing horizontal sound ﬁ eld through the use of front height speakers.

BASIC

HD Audio decoder

This unit incorporates a high-sound-quality HD audio decoder that employs a 32-bit digital signal processor (DSP) and 192 kHz/24-bit D/A converter.

OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

In addition to conventional digital surround, it faithfully reproduces content in the latest formats

BASIC

provided by Blu-ray discs and other such media.

• Dolby True HD

• Dolby Digital Plus

• DTS-HD (Master Audio, Hi-Resolution Audio)

ADVANCED

Audyssey MultEQ

Audyssey MultEQ is a room equalization solution that calibrates any audio system so that it can achieve optimum performance for every listener in a large listening area. Based on several room measurements, MultEQ® calculate an equalization solution that corrects for both time and frequency

SETUP

response problems in the listening area and also performs a fully automated surround system setup.

Audyssey Dynamic EQ

Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of

OPERATION

deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased

ADVANCED

by taking into account human perception and room acoustics. Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ to provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Audyssey Dynamic Volume

Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into Audyssey Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and

OTHERS

dialog clarity remain the same.

High-power 7-channel ampliﬁ er

The unit features a high-power, wide-range discrete ampliﬁ er that brings the same high level of performance to all the channels and is backed by a powerful power supply consisting of a largesized power transformer and capacitors boasting an impressively high capacitance. Regardless of whether movies or music is to be reproduced, this amplifier packs outstanding speaker drive capability.

HDMI

The unit has HDMI input and output terminals that support the following functions.

• Deep Color

• Dolby True HD

• DTS-HD Master Audio

• SACD

• DVD-Audio SR6004 enables two outputs to be selected so that

users can switch between a TV set and projector, for instance, and use the output signals of the selected component.

Video converter

The unit contains a video converter that features

digital processing to provide not only up-conversion from video/S-Video → component → HDMI but down-conversion from component → video as well.

Video scaler

The video scaler has a high-precision 10-bit scaler IC chip.

It is capable of up-scaling 480i, 480p, 720p or 1080i signals input to the analog video terminals to signals up to the 1080p/60 format and outputting them to HDMI.

I/P converter

The unit has a high-performance interlace/ progressive (I/P) converter. Its role is to provide accurate I/P conversion at high speed for 480i composite, S-Video or component video signals supplied to the unit, and to output high-quality and smooth 480p images to the unit's component video output terminals.

GUI

This unit uses the Graphical User Interface in the setup menu. Setup using eye-pleasing 3D graphics is possible using the speaker setup or acoustic equalizer setup menu.

M-XPort (Marantz-eXtension Port)

The unit has the M-XPort, a Marantz original innovation, which boasts excellent expandability. Accompanying SR6004 is the RX101 wireless receiver, which can be used as a receiver for Bluetooth audio and infrared remote controller. Users who have purchased the model SR5004 can purchase the RX101, which is available as an optional accessory, and connect it.

USB terminal (SR6004 only)

iPods of the ﬁ fth and later generations as well as the iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod touch and iPhone can be connected to the USB terminal on the SR6004. Since the sound from the iPod is transmitted digitally (using linear pulse code modulation (LPCM) encoding), it can be reproduced with high sound quality through the SR6004. By connecting a USB medium, it is also possible to reproduce content that has been recorded in MP3, AAC, WMA or WAV format.

M-DAX (Marantz-Dynamic Audio eXpander)

The M-DAX function, a Marantz original innovation, which compensates for components in the high frequency range that have been lost in MP3, AAC or other contents by lossy compression, is provided.

Learning remote controller with backlight

SR6004 comes with the RC007SR learning remote controller with LCD display and easy-to-operate macro function. SR5004 comes with the RC008SR learning remote controller. Both of these controllers have a backlight so they can be used even when the indoor lighting has been dimmed or turned off.

Multi-ZONE function

The unit is equipped with ZONE A OUT terminals for use in two rooms in addition to the main ZONE. The SR6004 also has a video selector function for selecting component video signals in ZONE A.

Other features

• Assignable Digital/Video/HDMI inputs

• Auto input signal detection

• Function rename

• Assignable DC trigger output

• IR ﬂ asher input

• RS232C terminal for future upgrade or system control

• HDCD decoder

• Dolby headphone

• Night mode

• Bi-amp drive

• Source/Pure direct mode

• 9bands,7channels G-EQ

• Video off mode

• Auto Lipsync(Audio Delay)

• Improvement station name input,60presets

BEFORE USE

ENGLISH

EQUIPMENT MAINS WORKING SETTING

Your Marantz product has been prepared to comply with the household power and safety requirements that exist in your area. This unit can be powered by 230V AC only.

DO NOT LOCATE IN THE FOLLOWING PLACES

To ensure long-lasting use, do not locate the unit where:

• Exposed to direct sunlight.

• Near to sources of heat such as heaters.

• Highly humid or poorly ventilated.

• Dusty.

• Subjected to mechanical vibrations.

• On wobbly, inclined or otherwise unstable surfaces

• Near windows where there is a chance of exposure to rain, etc.

• On top of an ampliﬁ er or other component which dissipates a great deal of heat

To ensure proper heat radiation, ensure the below clearance from walls and other equipment.

Left 0.2 m (8 in) or more

Above 0.2 m (8 in) or more

Right 0.2 m

(8 in) or more

KEEP OBJECTS OFF

Keep objects off the unit. Blocking the vent can result in accident and damage.

DO NOT TOUCH HOT AREAS, ESPECIALLY AROUND THE “HOT

Hot surface mark

SURFACE MARK” DURING AND IMMEDIATELY AFTER USE

During and immediately after use, this product is hot in areas other than the controls and rear panel connection jacks. Do not touch hot areas, especially around the “hot surface mark” and the top panel. Contact with hot areas can cause burns.

OPENING AND CLOSING THE FRONT PANEL DOOR (SR6004 ONLY)

When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these controls.

USAGE OF REMOTE CONTROLLER

LOADING BATTERIES

Before using the remote controller for the ﬁ rst time, load the batteries in the remote controller. The batteries provided are used to verify the operations of the remote controller only.

1. Remove the battery cover.

2. Paying close attention to polarity indicators

(ª plus and · minus), be sure to insert batteries correctly and as indicated.

3. Return the battery cover to its original

position.

CAUTIONS ON HANDLING BATTERIES

Misusing batteries can lead to ﬁ re, injury or soiling of surrounding area as a result of leakage, rupture or corrosion. Carefully read the following precautions before using batteries.

• Insert the batteries while ensuring that their ª and · poles are properly aligned with the corresponding markings on the remote controller.

• Batteries of the same size and shape may have different voltages. Do not use any battery except the type indicated. Do not use old and new batteries together, and do not use different types of batteries together.

• Do not recharge batteries.

• Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Seek medical attention if accidentally ingested.

• Do not carry or store batteries together with metal ball point pens, necklaces, coins, hair pins, etc.

• If you will not be using the remote controller for an extended time (1 month or more), remove the batteries to prevent leakage. If batteries leak, do not touch the ﬂ uid with bare hands. Wipe away any ﬂ uid in the case and put in new batteries. When doing so, handle with care, because ﬂ uid on skin or clothing presents a burn risk. If you accidentally get ﬂ uid on your skin, immediately wash with water and seek medical attention.

• Do not heat or take apart batteries or put them in ﬂ ame or water.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

Rear 0.2 m (8 in) or more

Caution

• Be careful not to pinch your ﬁ ngers between the door and the panel.

• When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or area.

• Do not expose the batteries to excessive heat such as direct sunlight, ﬁ re or the like.

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

BEFORE USE

ENGLISH

NAMES AND FUNCTION

REMOTE CONTROL

Operate the remote controller within a distance of approx. 5m from the infrared receptor window on

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

the front of the unit.

BASIC

Approx. 5m (16.4 ft)

BASIC

ADVANCED

Caution

• Do not allow direct sunlight, an inverter ﬂ uorescent light or other strong source of light to shine onto the playerʼs infrared receptor window. Otherwise, the operation of the remote controller may be disabled.

SETUP

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

• Bear in mind that operating the remote controller may cause other devices operated by infrared rays to be operated by mistake.

• The remote controller cannot be operated if the space between the controller and the playerʼs infrared receptor window is obstructed.

• Do not place any objects on top of the remote controller.

Doing so may cause one or more buttons to be

held down which will cause the batteries to run down.

Remote controller

FRONT PANEL

SR6004

qw e tyu i o !0 !1 !2 !3 !4!5 !6

SR5004

qw e tyu i o !0 !1 !2 !3 !4!5 !6

!7!8@0@1@2

q POWER switch and STANDBY

indicator

Press the button to turn the power ON, and press again to turn it OFF. If the POWER switch is in the ON position, the power of this unit can be turned ON/OFF by pressing the POWER button on the remote controller. When this unit is in the standby mode with the POWER switch set to the ON position, pressing the ENTER button also allows to turn the power on. The STANDBY indicator lights up when this unit is the standby mode (power OFF) by the remote controller.

w INPUT SELECTOR knob

This knob is used to select the input sources. (See page 16)

e SURR. MODE button

Press this button to select the surround mode.

r DYNAMIC VOL. indicator

This indicator illuminates while the Audyssey Dynamic VolumeTM is in use.

t DYNAMIC EQ. indicator

This indicator illuminates while the Audyssey Dynamic EQTM is in use.

y AUTO button

Press this button to select the AUTO mode from the surround modes. When this mode is selected, the unit determines the surround mode corresponding to a digital input signal automatically.

OTHERS

u PURE DIRECT button

Press this button to select the pure direct mode or

!7!8@1@2

source direct mode.

i DISPLAY button

Press this button to change the FL display mode.

ENGLISH

AA C MP 3

WM A

Express

NAMES AND FUNCTION

o MENU button

Press this button to enter the SETUP MAIN MENU.

!0 EXIT button

Press this button to exit from the SETUP MAIN MENU.

!1 BAND button

Press this button to switch between FM and AM in the TUNER mode.

!2 T.MODE button

Press this button to select the auto stereo mode or mono mode when the FM band is selected. The “AUTO” indicator lights in the auto stereo mode. (See page 17)

!3 MEMORY button

Press this button to enter the tuner preset memory numbers or station names. (See page 44)

!4 PURE DIRECT indicator

This indicator illuminates when PURE DIRECT mode has been selected.

!5 CLEAR button

Press this button to cancel the station-memory setting mode or preset scan tuning. (See page 44)

!8 AUX INPUT jacks

These auxiliary video/audio input jacks accept the connections of a camcorder, portable DVD, game etc.

Note

VIDEO terminal and S-VIDEO terminal cannot be used at the same time. When using S-VIDEO teminal, do not connect any component to the VIDEO terminal.

!9 Cursor (3, 4, 1, 2) / ENTER button

Press these buttons to operate the SETUP MAIN MENU and TUNER function.

@0 USB connector (SR6004)

Connect USB media or iPod to this USB connector. (See page 19, 47)

@1 SETUP MIC jack

Automatically measure speaker characteristics using the included microphone. (See page 27)

@2 PHONES jack

This jack may be used to listen to the unit’s output through a pair of headphones. Be certain that the headphones have a standard 1/4” stereo phono plug.

FL DISPLAY AND INDICATOR

a sd f g j ¡0 ¡1 ¡2¡3 ¡5 ¡6 ¡7

a SP (speaker) ABC indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the speaker system is active.

s SLEEP timer indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the sleep timer function in the main-ZONE is in use.

d DISP (Display Off) indicator

This indicator is illuminated when this unit is in the display off mode.

f MULTI (ZONE system) AB indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the ZONE system is active.

j PEAK indicator

This indicator is a monitor for an analog audio input signal. If the selected analog audio input signal is greater than the capable level of internal processing, this will illuminate. If this happens, you should press the ATT button on the remote controller. (See page 8, 41)

k V-OFF (Video off mode) indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the Video-OFF function is active.

l A-SURR

(Auto Surround mode) indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the AUTO SURROUND mode is in use.

¡4klh

Express

WMA

AAC MP3

ex1 ex2

¡8¡9

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

!6 VOLUME control knob

This knob is used to adjust the overall sound level. Turning the control clockwise increases the sound level.

!7 Infrared receiving sensor window

This window receives infrared signals for the remote controller.

g TUNER’s indicators

AUTO : This indicator illuminates when the

tuner’s Auto mode is in use.

TUNED : This indicator illuminates when the

tuner receives a sufﬁ ciently strong radio signal.

ST(Stereo) : This indicator illuminates when an

FM station is being tuned into stereo condition.

RDS : This indicator lights when an RDS

signal is being received.

h ATT (Attenuation) indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the attenuation function is active.

¡0 EQ mode indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the HT-EQ function is active.

¡1 NIGHT mode indicator

This indicator is illuminated when this unit is in the Night mode, which reduces the dynamic range of digital program material at low volume levels.

¡2 M-DAX indicator

This indicator illuminates when this unit is in the M-DAX mode.

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND FUNCTION

¡3 HDMI indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the HDMI device is connected to the unit.

CONNECTIONS

¡4 Audyssey® indicator

BASIC

This indicator is illuminated when the EQ MODE is selected to “AUDYSSEY”, “AUDYSSEY FRONT” or “AUDYSSEY FLAT”.

OPERATION

¡5 DIGITAL input indicator

BASIC

This indicator is illuminated when a digital input has been selected.

¡6 ANALOG input indicator

CONNECTIONS

This indicator is illuminated when an analog input

ADVANCED

source has been selected.

¡7 Signal format indicators

2 TrueHD

This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital True HD signal is input.

2 DIGITAL

SETUP

This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital signal is input.

2 DIGITAL PLUS

This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital Plus signal is input.

OPERATION

2 DIGITAL EX

ADVANCED

This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital EX signal is input.

dts

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS signal is input.

dts ES

TROUBLESHOOTING

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS ES signal is input.

dts-HD MSTR

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS-HD Master Audio signal is input.

dts-HD HIRES

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS-HD High Resulution Audio signal is input.

OTHERS

dts 96/24

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS 96/24 signal is input.

Express

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS Express signal input.

HDCD

This indicator is illuminated when the HDCD signal is decoded from digital input signal.

PCM

This indicator is illuminated when the input signal is PCM (pulse code modulation).

DSD

This indicator is illuminated when a DSD signal is input.

AAC

This indicator lights when AAC format ﬁ les on the USB media are played back.

WMA

This indicator lights when WMA format ﬁ les on the USB media are played back.

MP3

This indicator lights when MP3 format ﬁ les on the USB media are played back.

¡8 Encoded channel status indicators

These indicators display the channels that are encoded with a digital input signal. If the digital input signal is Dolby Digital 5.1ch or DTS 5.1ch, “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”, “SR” and “LFE” will be illuminated. If the digital input signal is 2 channel PCM-audio, “L” and “R” will be illuminated. If the digital input signal is Dolby Digital 5.1ch signal with Surround EX ﬂ ag or DTS-ES, “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”, “S” , “SR” and “LFE” will be illuminated. If the digital input signal is 7.1 channel PCM-audio. “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”, “SBL”, “SR” “SBR”, and “LFE” will be illuminated. If the digital input signal includes a channel other than those above, “ex1” or “ex2” will be illuminated. (See page 73)

Note

When the unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD, the input signal status displayed depends on the number of channels of the speakers used. If a 7.1-channel signal is supplied for a 5.1-channel speaker system (L/C/R/SL/SR/SW), the “SBL”,

“SBR”, “S” indicator is not illuminated.

¡9 Main information display

This display shows messages relating to the status, input source, surround mode, tuner, volume level or other aspects of unit’s operation.

REMOTE CONTROLLER

The provided remote controller is a universal remote controller. The POWER button, numeric buttons and control buttons are used in common across different input source components. The input source controlled with the remote controller changes when one of the input selector buttons is pressed. The RC007SR remote controller is provided with SR6004, and the RC008SR is provided with SR5004.

SR6004

‹3

‹2 ‹1 ‹0 ¤9 ¤8

¤7

¤6

¤5 ¤4

¤3

¤2 ¤1

¤0

⁄9

⁄8

z x

c v b

n m

, .

⁄0 ⁄1

⁄2

⁄3

⁄4 ⁄5

⁄6

⁄7

SR5004

‹3

‹9 ‹8

‹2 ‹1 ‹0 ¤9 ¤8

¤7

¤6

¤5 ¤4

¤3

¤2 ¤1

¤0

⁄9

z x

c v b

n m

, .

⁄0 ⁄1

⁄2

⁄3

⁄4 ⁄5

⁄6

⁄7⁄8

ENGLISH

NAMES AND FUNCTION

z I / POWER ON and OFF buttons

(When AMP mode is selected)

These buttons are used to turn the unit on or off.

x Z.SPKR button

(When AMP mode is selected)

This button is used to turn on and off ZONE speaker.

c ZONE A / B buttons

These button are used to turn the ZONE system on or off.

v 7.1 (7.1CH IN) button

This button is used to select the output of an external multi channel decoder.

b SPKR A/B button

This button is used to select the speaker system. The speaker system is switched in the following sequence. A → B → A+B → off → A

n MUTE button

This button is used to mute the audio for the ampliﬁ er.

m LIGHT button

This button is used to turn on the backlight for the buttons.

, VOLUME +/– buttons

This button is used to adjust the volume for the ampliﬁ er.

. SURR (SURROUND) button

(When a mode other than USB is selected)

This button is used to selects the surround mode.

(When USB mode is selected)

This button is used to select the next page.

⁄0 INFO button

(When AMP mode is selected)

When this button is pressed, the current setting of AV receiver are displayed on the connected TV monitor.

(When USB mode is selected)

The display is switched between the list screen and status screen during iPod operations.

⁄1 1, 2, 3, 4 (CURSOR) / ENTER

buttons

These buttons are used when controlling the cursor of the unit, DVD or other AV equipment.

(When Tuner mode mode is selected)

PRESET +/ PRESET - buttons

Used to select a preset station up and down.

TUNE 3 /TUNE 4 buttons

Used to tune a frequency station up and down.

⁄2 EXIT / MEMO button

(When AMP mode is selected)

This button is used to cancel setting in the setup menu.

(When TUNER mode is selected)

This button is used to store the setting of preset channel and others.

⁄3 CONTROL buttons

These buttons are used when operating PLAY, STOP, PAUSE and other commands of a source.

(When TUNER mode is selected)

T.MODE button

This button is used to select auto stereo mode or mono mode when the FM band is selected. The “AUTO” indicator lights in the auto stereo mode.

P.SCAN button

This button is used to start preset scan.

BAND button

This button is used to select a radio band.

T.DISP button

This button is used to select the display mode in RDS.

PTY button

This button is used to display the programme type information of the current station.

F.DIRECT button

This button is used to select the "Frequency direct input".

P.LOCK button

This button is not used for this unit.

(When USB mode is selected)

; button

This pauses playback.

2 button

This starts playback.

9 button

This stops playback.

∞ / § buttons

Skips forward or previous.

5 / 6 buttons

Searches forward or backward.

⁄4 REPEAT button

This button is used to select the REPEAT mode of a source.

⁄5 RANDOM button

This button is used to select the RANDOM mode of a source.

⁄6 TV CONTROL buttons

These buttons are used when operating of TV and Monitor.

⁄7 BASS / TV CH +/– buttons

(When AMP mode is selected)

These buttons are used to adjust the tone control of low frequency sound for left, right and subwoofer speaker.

(When TV/DSS mode are selected)

These buttons are used to change channels.

⁄8 TREBLE / CAT +/– buttons

(When AMP mode is selected)

These buttons are used to adjust the tone control of high frequency sound for left and right speaker.

⁄9 CLR (Clear) / T.TONE button

This button is used to erase the memory or program of a source include the Tuner mode.

(When AMP mode is selected)

This button is used to enter the test tone menu.

¤0 Numeric buttons

These buttons are used to switch between 0 to +10 of the source components. If the source is set to the ampliﬁ er, these buttons are used to perform operations.

(When AMP mode is selected)

1/AUTO button

This button is used to select auto surround.

2/STEREO button

This button is used to select STEREO mode.

3/P.DIRECT button

When this button is pressed once, SOURCE DIRECT mode is selected. If pressed again, PURE DIRECT mode is selected.

4/SLEEP button

This button is used for setting the sleep timer.

5/M-DAX button

This button is used to select M-DAX mode.

6/EQ button

This button is used to select EQ modes including Audyssey® (see page 37).

7/LIP SYNC button

This button is used to select LIP SYNC mode.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND FUNCTION

ENGLISH

8/NIGHT button

Pressing this button prevents the Dolby Digital signal from playback at a loud voice.

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

When this button is pressed, the “NIGHT” indicator is illuminated.

BASIC

9/D.EQ/VOL buton

This button is used to select Audyssey Dynamic EQ/Dynamic Volume modes.

0/CH SEL button

This button is used to call up CH LEVEL ADJUST and adjust speaker levels or 7.1 ch input level.

BASIC

+10/V.OFF button

This button is used to turn off the video signal.

¤1 M (MACRO) button (SR6004)

CONNECTIONS

This button is used to program Macros. Pressing

ADVANCED

this button switches between Normal mode and Macro mode.

HT-EQ button (SR5004)

This button is used to turn on or off HT (Home Theater)-EQ mode.

SETUP

¤2 MENU button

(When AMP mode is selected)

This button is used to call up the SETUP MAIN MENU of the unit.

OPERATION

(When USB mode is selected)

ADVANCED

Pressing this button during iPod operation moves you to higher-level page.

¤3 TOP button

TROUBLESHOOTING

(When AMP mode is selected)

Pressing this button during setup returns you to the top screen of the setup main menu.

(When USB mode is selected)

Pressing this button displays the highest-level item.

¤4 DISPLAY button

(When a mode other than USB is selected)

This button is used to selects the display mode for the front display of the unit.

(When USB mode is selected)

This button is used to select the previous page.

¤5 INPUT 3 button

This button is for forward-feeding the input source to select a desired source.

INPUT 4 button

This button is for backward-feeding the input source to select a desired source.

¤6 SETUP/MODE button

This button is used to setup for DVD and other device.

(When USB mode is selected)

This buttong is used to switch between direct/ remote mode during iPod opetation.

¤7 SOURCE button

These buttons are used to switch the source of your A/V Receiver. Each time a source button is pressed, the remote controller changes to the source which was pressed. This remote controller can control 12 types of equipment. To change the A/V Receiver source, press this button twice within two seconds. The signal is sent when it is pressed the second time.

Notes

• Select the AMP as the source to use this remote controller with the unit.

• In the case of SR5004, the USB button cannot be used.

¤8 ATT button

When the input signal is too high and the voice distorts even by throttling the unit VOLUME control, turn on this function. “ATT” is indicated when this function is activated. The input level reduced. Attenuator is invalid for the output signal of “REC OUT”.

Note

This function is unavailable while the digital input is selected.

¤9 A/D button

This button is used to switch between the analog and digital inputs.

‹0 HDMI button (SR6004)

This button is used to select HDMI OUTPUT 1 or

‹1 SET button

This button is used to enter learn mode and preset mode.

‹2 I / SOURCE ON/OFF button

This button is used to turn a speciﬁ c source (such as a DVD player) on or off independently from the rest of the system.

‹3 Infrared transmitter and learning

sensor

This transmitter emits infrared light. Press the buttons while pointing the transmitter towards the infrared receiver window of the unit or other AV equipment. Be sure to also point towards other remote controllers when using the learning function.

SR6004

‹4 ‹5 ‹7‹6

‹4 LEARN indicator

This indicator is displayed when the remote controller is in the LEARN mode.

‹5 MACRO indicator

This is displayed when a macro program is selected by the remote controller.

‹6 Information indicator

Information about the sources and modes are shown on the LCD.

‹7 indicator

This indicator is displayed when the remote controller is transmitting a signal.

SR5004

‹8 SEND indicator

Indicates when the remote controller is transmitting a signal.

‹9 LEARN indicator

Indicates when the remote controller is in the LEARN mode.

OTHERS

ENGLISH

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANALOG AUDIO

7.1CH INPUT

PRE OUT

RS-232C

IN 1

(

)

IN 5

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

IN 1

IN 2

(

DVD

)

(

)

ANTENNA

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

VCR

DVDBDBD

SBL

OFF

FLASHER IN

ZONE A

DSSTVTV

CD/CDR

OUTININININININ

SBR

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

OUT

SBL/HL

SBR/HR

AC IN

MODEL NO. SR6004

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 4

(

DSS

)

OUT 1

OUT 2

OUT

(

VCR

)

IN 3

(

VCR

)

REC/ZONE B

OUT

IN 1

(

)

MONITOR OUT

IN 4

(

DSS

)

IN 2

(

DVD

)

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 2

(

DVD

)

IN 1

(

)

OUT

SURROUND

CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

GNDAMAM

FRONT B

/HEIGHT

FRONT A

DIGITAL AUDIO

XPort

SPEAKER C

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANALOG AUDIO

7.1CH INPUT

PRE OUT

RS-232C

IN 1

(

)

IN 2

(

DVD

)

(

)

ANTENNA

VCR

DVDBDBD

SBL

FLASHER IN

ZONE A

DSSTVTV

CD/CDR

OUTININ

SBR

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

OUT

AC IN

MODEL NO. SR5004

IN 3

(

VCR

)

OUT

(

VCR

)

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 1

(

)

MONITOR OUT

IN 4

(

DSS

)

IN 2

(

DVD

)

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 2

(

DVD

)

IN 1

(

)

OUT

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

SURROUND

FRONT B

/HEIGHT

FRONT A

CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

OFF

SBL/HL

SBR/HR

GNDAMAM

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

IN 1

REC/ZONE B

OUT

DIGITAL AUDIO

XPort

SPEAKER C

NAMES AND FUNCTION

REAR PANEL

SR6004

@4 @3 @2

@1 @0

SR5004

@4 @3 @2

@1 @0

SPEAKER C

ANTENNA

RRSRSRSWSWSBR/HR

SPEAKER C

ANTENNA

RRSRSRSW

q w e r t y u i

IN 1

MM--XPort

ONONOFF

PRE OUT

SLSLC

IN 2

DIGITAL AUDIO

FLASHER IN

(

)

7575Ω

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

OUT

GND

SBL/HL

7.1CH INPUT

FRONT B

OUT

RRL

(

IN 1

SBL

CCZONE A

SBR

/HEIGHT

)

(

)

(

)

(

VCR

ANALOG AUDIO

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

)

IN 4

DSS

OUT 1

OUT 2

DSS

CD/CDR

OUT

SURROUND

INININININ

OUT

CENTER

OUT

IN 2

FRONT A

DVD

IN 3

DVD

LLR

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

REC/ZONE B

IN 5

IN 4

IN 3

!3!4!5

COMPONENT VIDEO

AC IN

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

(

)

(

)

(

)

IN 3

VCR

IN 2

DVD

IN 1

OUT

q w e r t y u i

IN 1

MM--XPort

ONONOFF

PRE OUT

SLSLC

IN 2

(

7575Ω

)

REC/ZONE B

IN 4

IN 3

DIGITAL AUDIO

ININFLASHER IN

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

OUT

GND

SBL/HL

SBR/HR

SRSRSW

7.1CH INPUT

FRONT B

OUT

RRL

(

)

IN 1

SBL

CCZONE A

SBR

/HEIGHT

(

)

(

DVD

IN 3

DVD

INININ

LLR

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

!3!4!5!8 !7

)

VCR

ANALOG AUDIO

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

OUT

DSS

CD/CDR

ININOUT

INININ

SURROUND

CENTER

IN 2

OUT

FRONT A

COMPONENT VIDEO

AC IN

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

(

)

(

)

(

)

IN 3

VCR

IN 2

DVD

IN 1

OUT

IN 1

IN 2

o!0!2!6!7!8!9

IN 1

IN 2

o!0!2!6!9

VIDEO

(

)

IN 3

(

)

IN 4

DVD

MODEL NO. SR6004

VIDEO

(

)

IN 3

(

)

IN 4

DVD

MODEL NO. SR5004

q DIGITAL AUDIO IN terminals

(Optical and Coaxial)

Connect these terminals to the digital signal output

!0 AC IN

Plug the supplied power cable into this AC INLET and then into the power outlet on the wall.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

terminal(s) of the digital component (such as DVD player, CD player or DSS system).

!1 AC OUTLET

This outlet provides power only when this unit is

w DIGITAL AUDIO REC / ZONE B

(

)

(

)

OUT

VCR

(

)

MONITOR OUT

DSS

RS-232C

OUT terminal (Optical)

Connect this terminal to the digital signal input terminal(s) of the digital recording component (such as a CD recorder) or another AV ampliﬁ er. (Page 21)

e HDMI IN terminals

Connect these terminals to a Blu-ray disc player or DVD player equipped with an HDMI output terminal(s). (Page 14)

turned on.

Note

When ZONE A or ZONE B is on, power will still be supplied to the unit even while the unit is in standby mode.

Caution

• In order to avoid potential turn-off thumps, anything plugged into this outlet should be powered up before this unit is turned on.

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

• The capacity of this AC outlet is 150W. Do not

r HDMI OUT terminals

Connect these terminals to a TV set or projector equipped with an HDMI input terminal(s). (Page 14)

t COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals

Connect these terminals to a video component equipped with component video output terminal(s).

connect devices that consume electricity more than the capacity of this outlet. If the total power consumption of the connected devices exceeds the capacity, the protection circuit shuts down the power supply.

!2 Speaker outputs terminals

Connect the speakers to these terminals. (Page 11)

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

(Page 13)

!3 ANALOG AUDIO IN/OUT terminals

(

)

(

)

OUT

VCR

(

)

MONITOR OUT

DSS

RS-232C

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals

Connect these terminals to a monitor TV or projector equipped with component video input terminal(s). (Page 13)

u VIDEO IN / OUT terminals

Connect these terminals to the video terminal(s) of a video component. (Page 13)

i VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal

Connect this terminal to the video input terminal(s) of a monitor TV or projector. (Page 13)

o RS-232C terminal

The RS-232C port is to be used in conjunction with an external controller to control the operation of the unit by using an external device.

Connect these terminals to the audio terminal(s) of an audio or video component. (Page 13)

!4 ZONE A OUT terminals

These are the audio output jacks for the ZONE A. Connect these jacks to optional audio power ampliﬁ ers to listen the source selected by the ZONE system in a remote room. (Page 21)

!5 7.1 CH INPUT terminals

By connecting a DVD Audio player, Super Audio CD multichannel player, or other components that has a multichannel port, you can playback the audio with

5.1 channel or 7.1 channel outputs. (Page 20)

!6 REMOTE CONT. IN/OUT terminals

Connect to a Marantz component equipped with remote control (RC-5) terminals. (Page 22)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND FUNCTION

ENGLISH

BASIC CONNECTIONS

!7 SW terminal

Connect this jack to the line level input of a powered subwoofer. If an external subwoofer ampliﬁ er is

CONNECTIONS

used, connect this jack to the subwoofer ampliﬁ er input. (Page 20)

BASIC

!8 PRE OUT terminals

Use these jacks for connection to external power ampliﬁ ers. (Page 20)

OPERATION

!9 AM antenna and ground terminals

BASIC

Connect the supplied AM loop antenna. (Page 15)

@0 FM antenna terminal (75 ohms)

CONNECTIONS

Connect an external FM antenna with a coaxial

ADVANCED

cable, or a cable network FM source. (Page 15)

@1 SPEAKER C selector switch

Set this switch to ON when using speaker C. Set it to OFF when using surround back speakers, height speakers or ZONE speaker A. (Page 19)

SETUP

@2 DC OUT terminal

Connect a device that needs to be triggered by DC under certain conditions (screen, power strip, etc…)

OPERATION

Use the system GUI setup menu to determine the

ADVANCED

conditions by which these jack will be active.

Note

This output voltage is for (status) control only, It is not sufﬁ cient for drive capability.

TROUBLESHOOTING

@3 FLASHER IN terminal

These terminals are to control the unit from each ZONE. Connect the control signal from a Keypad, etc.

@4 M-XPort terminal

OTHERS

Connect the Marantz wireless receiver RX101 to this terminal. (Page 19)

SPEAKER PLACEMENT

The ideal surround speaker system for this unit is 9-speaker systems, using front left and right speakers, a center speaker, surround left and right speakers, a surround back left and right speakers, a subwoofer and front height left and right speakers. For best results we recommend that all front speakers be of the same type, with identical or similar driver units. This will deliver smooth pans across the front sound stage as the action moves from side to side. Your center channel speaker is very important as over 80 % of the dialog from a typical motion picture emanates from the center channel. It should possess similar sonic characteristics to the main speakers. Surround channel speakers need not be identical to the front channel speakers, but they should be of high quality. The surround back speaker is useful for playback of Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES. One of the beneﬁ ts of both Dolby Digital and DTS is that surround channels are discrete full range, while they were frequency limited in earlier “Pro Logic” type systems. Bass effects are an important part of home theater. For optimal enjoyment a subwoofer should be used as it is optimized for low frequency reproduction. If you have full range front speakers, however, they may be used in place of a subwoofer with proper setting of the switches in the menu system.

Subwoofer

Front Right

Front Height Right

Front Center

Front Left

Front Height Left

Surround Left

Surround Right

Surround Back Right

Surround Back Left

FRONT LEFT AND RIGHT SPEAKERS

We recommend to set the front L and R speakers with 45-60 degrees from the listening position.

CENTER SPEAKER

Align the front line of the center speaker with the front L/R speakers. Or place the center speaker a little backward from the line.

SURROUND LEFT AND RIGHT SPEAKERS

When this unit is used in surround operation, the preferred location for surround speakers is on the side walls of the room, at or slightly behind the listening position. The center of the speaker should face into the room.

SURROUND BACK LEFT AND RIGHT SPEAKERS

Surround back speakers are required when a full

7.1-channel system is installed. Speakers should be placed on a rear wall, behind the listening position. The center of the speaker should face into the room.

SUBWOOFER

We recommend using a subwoofer to have maximum bass effect. As the subwoofer only handle low frequency. You can place it any where in the room.

FRONT HEIGHT LEFT AND RIGHT SPEAKERS

These speakers are required to reproduce Dolby Pro Logic IIz sound. They enhance the sound effects that create a 3dimensional space.

HEIGHT OF THE SPEAKER UNITS

FRONT LEFT AND RIGHT SPEAKERS, AND A CENTER SPEAKER

Align the tweeters and mid-range drivers on the three front speakers at the same height, as best as possible.

Note

Use magnetically-shielded speakers for front left, right and the center speakers when the speakers are installed near the TV.

SURROUND LEFT AND RIGHT SPEAKERS, AND SURROUND BACK SPEAKER

Place the surround left, right and surround back speakers higher than your ears by about 70cm–1m (2.3 – 3.3 ft). Also place the speakers at the same height, as best as possible.

FRONT HEIGHT LEFT AND RIGHT SPEAKERS

Position these speakers 1 m (3.3 ft.) higher than the front left and right speakers. They may be placed at an angle that is wider than the front speakers but, ideally, should be placed at the same angle as the front speakers and higher than them.

CONNECTING SPEAKERS

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANALOG AUDIO

7.1CH INPUT

PRE OUT

RS-232C

IN 1

(

)

IN 5

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

IN 1

IN 2

(

DVD

)

(

)

ANTENNA

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

VCR

DVDBDBD

SBL

OFF

FLASHER IN

ZONE A

DSSTVTV

CD/CDR

OUTININININININ

SBR

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

OUT

SBL/HL

SBR/HR

AC IN

MODEL NO. SR6004

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 4

(

DSS

)

OUT 1

OUT 2

OUT

(

VCR

)

IN 3

( VCR

)

REC/ZONE B

OUT

IN 1

(

)

MONITOR OUT

IN 4

(

DSS

)

IN 2

(

DVD

)

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 2

( DVD

)

IN 1

(

)

OUT

SURROUND

CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

GNDAMAM

FRONT B

/HEIGHT

FRONT A

DIGITAL AUDIO

XPort

SPEAKER C

PRE OUT

SURROUND

CENTER

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

FRONT B

/HEIGHT

FRONT A

• Be sure to use speakers with the speciﬁ ed impedance as shown on the rear panel of this unit.

• When the subwoofer you are connecting is a powered subwoofer (i.e., has a built-in amp), connect it to the PRE OUT subwoofer jack.

Powered

subwoofer

IN 1

MM--XPort

SPEAKER C

ONONOFF

(

7575Ω

ANTENNA

SLSLC

RRSRSRSWSWSBR/HR

PRE OUT

FRONT B/HEIGHT

(

IN 3

VCR

DVD

ANALOG AUDIO

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

Left

)

(

)

IN 4

DSS

OUT 1

VCR

DSS

OUT

SURROUND

Right

REC/ZONE B

IN 5

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

DIGITAL AUDIO

FLASHER IN

OUT

)

GND

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

SBL/HL

OUT

7.1CH INPUT

RRL

FRONT B

(

)

IN 1

SBL

CCZONE A

SBR

/HEIGHT

OUT

IN 2

FRONT A

(

DVD

)

LLR

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

FRONT A

COMPONENT VIDEO

AC IN

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

Left

(

)

(

)

IN 2

DVD

IN 1

Right

OUT 2

CD/CDR

INININININ

OUT

CENTER

(

)

IN 3

VCR

OUT

Surround BACK

VIDEO

(

)

OUT

IN 3

VCR

(

)

MONITOR OUT

IN 4

DSS

RS-232C

MODEL NO. SR6004

Left

(

)

VCR

Right

(

IN 1

(

IN 2

DVD

Notes

To prevent damage to circuitry, do not let the bare

• speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit.

• Do not touch the speaker terminals when the power is on. It may cause you to receive an electric shocks.

• Do not connect more than one speaker cable to one speaker terminal. Doing so may damage this unit.

• Be sure to connect the positive and negative cables for the speaker properly. If they are missconnected, the signal phase will be reversed and the signal quality will be corrupted.

ENGLISH

BASIC CONNECTIONS

CONNECTING SPEAKER WIRE

1. Strip away approx. 10 mm (3/8 inch) of wire

insulation.

2. Twist the bared wire ends tight, to prevent

short circuits.

3. Loosen the knob by turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Insert the bare part of the wire into the hole

in side of each terminal.

5. Tighten the knob by turning it clockwise to

secure the wire.

1. 2.

10 mm (3/8 inch)

3. 4. 5.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

Center

Right Left

Surround

OTHERS

NAMES AND

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANALOG AUDIO

7.1CH INPUT

PRE OUT

RS-232C

IN 1

(

)

IN 5

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

IN 1

IN 2

(

DVD

)

(

)

ANTENNA

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

VCR

DVDBDBD

SBL

OFF

FLASHER IN

ZONE A

DSSTVTV

CD/CDR

OUTININININININ

SBR

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

OUT

SBL/HL

SBR/HR

AC IN

MODEL NO. SR6004

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 4

(

DSS

)

OUT 1

OUT 2

OUT

(

VCR

)

IN 3

( VCR

)

REC/ZONE B

OUT

IN 1

(

)

MONITOR OUT

IN 4

(

DSS

)

IN 2

(

DVD

)

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 2

(

DVD

)

IN 1

(

)

OUT

SURROUND

CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

GNDAMAM

FRONT B

/HEIGHT

FRONT A

DIGITAL AUDIO

XPort

SPEAKER C

ANALOG AUDIO

CD/CDR

OUT

REC/ZONE B

OUT

IN 2

DIGITAL AUDIO

FUNCTIONS

BASIC CONNECTIONS

ENGLISH

CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS

The output audio signal from the CD/CDR OUT jack is the same signal which is currently selected.

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

ADVANCED

SETUP

OPERATION

ADVANCED

ANTENNA

DIGITAL OUTPUT

IN 2

IN 1

IN 2

MM--XPort

FLASHER IN

SPEAKER C

ONONOFF

(

)

7575Ω

SLSLC

RRSRSRSWSWSBR/HR

PRE OUT

CD recorder

DIGITAL

INPUT

IN 4

IN 3

DIGITAL AUDIO

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

OUT

GND

SBL/HL

LRL

REC/ZONE B

IN 5

7.1CH INPUT

OUT IN

REC/ZONE B

OUT

RRL

FRONT B

CONNECTING DIGITAL AUDIO COMPONENTS

• Refer to the instructions for each component. To setup the digital audio format of CD player, or other digital source’s connected to digital input jacks.

• Use ﬁ ber optical cables (optical) for optical input jacks and REC/ZONE B optical output jack. Use 75 ohms coaxial cables (for digital audio or video) for coaxial input jacks.

• You can designate the input for each digital input/output jacks according to your component. (See page

Analog Audio

R LRL

Digital Audio (coaxial)

L R

Digital Audio (optical)

R L RL

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

IN 1

IN 2

DVD

IN 3

SBL

SBR

/HEIGHT

DVD

ZONE A

OUT

LLR

FRONT A

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

VCR

ANALOG AUDIO

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

)

IN 4

DSS

OUT 1

OUT 2

DSS

CD/CDR

OUT

SURROUND

INININININ

ININOUT

OUT

CENTER

COMPONENT VIDEO

AC IN

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

(

)

(

)

IN 3

VCR

IN 2

DVD

IN 1

VIDEO

(

)

(

)

(

)

OUT

IN 1

(

IN 2

IN 3

)

IN 4

DVD

RS-232C

MODEL NO. SR6004

OUT

VCR

(

)

MONITOR OUT

DSS

24)

Notes

• The digital signal jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a cable that does not conform to

this standard, this unit may not function properly.

• Each type of audio jack works independently. Signals input through the digital and analog jacks are output

through the corresponding digital and analog jacks, respectively.

Notes

• Do not connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have

TROUBLESHOOTING

been completed.

• Insert all plugs and connectors securely. Incomplete connections may make noise.

• Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly. Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and white connectors are for the L (left) channel.

• Be sure to connect input and output properly.

• Refer to the instructions for each component that is connected to this unit.

• Do not bind audio/video connection cables with power cables and speaker cables this will result in generating

OTHERS

a hum or other noise.

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANALOG AUDIO

7.1CH INPUT

PRE OUT

RS-232C

IN 1

(

)

IN 5

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

IN 1

IN 2

(

DVD

)

(

)

ANTENNA

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

VCR

DVDBDBD

SBL

OFF

FLASHER IN

ZONE A

DSSTVTV

CD/CDR

OUTININININININ

SBR

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

OUT

SBL/HL

SBR/HR

AC IN

MODEL NO. SR6004

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 4

(

DSS

)

OUT 1

OUT 2

OUT

(

VCR

)

IN 3

( VCR

)

REC/ZONE B

OUT

IN 1

(

)

MONITOR OUT

IN 4

(

DSS

)

IN 2

(

DVD

)

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 2

(

DVD

)

IN 1

(

)

OUT

SURROUND

CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

GNDAMAM

FRONT B

/HEIGHT

FRONT A

DIGITAL AUDIO

XPort

SPEAKER C

ANALOG AUDIO

IN 1

VCR

DVD

DSSTVTV

OUTININININ

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

OUT

(

VCR

)

MONITOR OUT

IN 4

(

DSS

)

IN 2

(

DVD

)

OUT

IN 3

( VCR

)

IN 4

DIGITAL AUDIO

IN 2

(

DVD

)

CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS

DVD player

DIGITAL

AUDIO

OUT

OUT LR

L R

R L

IN 1

IN 3

IN 2

IN 1

MM--XPort

FLASHER IN

SPEAKER C

ANTENNA

ONONOFF

(

)

7575Ω

SLSLC

RRSRSRSWSWSBR/HR

PRE OUT

L R L R

DC OUT

GND

REMOTE CONT.

SBL/HL

L LR R

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

IN 4

DIGITAL AUDIO

OUT

REC/ZONE B

IN 5

7.1CH INPUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

/ PBCR

/ PR

(

IN 1

OUT

SBL

CCZONE A

SBR

RRL

FRONT B

/HEIGHT

VIDEO

OUT IN

)

OUT

FRONT A

(

IN 2

DVD

)

IN 3

DVD

LLR

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

(

)

VCR

ANALOG AUDIO

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

DIGITAL

Satellite tuner

AUDIO

OUT LR

L R

(

)

IN 4

DSS

OUT

SURROUND

OUT

OUT 1

INININ

L R

AUDI O

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

OUT 2

CD/CDR

INININININ

OUT

CENTER

VIDEO

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

COMPONENT VIDEO

IN 1

AC IN

Video

Analog Audio

Digital Audio (coaxial)

Digital Audio (optical)

S-Video

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

OUT

IN 3

VCR

IN 2

DVD

IN 2

DVD

OUT

/ PBCR

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

IN 1

(

IN 2

/ PR

L R

VIDEO

(

)

IN 3

)

IN 4

DVD

IN 4

DVD

RS-232C

MODEL NO. SR6004

ENGLISH

BASIC CONNECTIONS

VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT JACKS

VIDEO JACK

The video signal for the VIDEO jacks is the conventional composite video signal.

COMPONENT JACK

Make component video connections to a TV or monitor with component inputs to produce higher quality video images. Use a component video cable or 3 video cords to connect the component video out jacks on the unit to the monitor.

S-VIDEO JACK

The video signal is separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) signals for the S-VIDEO jack.

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

OUT

VCR

OUT

VCR

(

)

(

)

MONITOR OUT

DSS

MONITOR OUT

DSS

L R

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

DIGITAL

OUT

Camcorder, portable DVD, Game etc.

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

Notes

• Be sure to connect the left and right audio channels properly.

Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and

white connectors are for the L (left) channel.

• Be sure to connect the inputs and outputs of the video signals properly.

• You may need to setup the digital audio output format of your DVD player, or other digital source components. Refer to the instructions of the each component connected to the digital input jacks.

• The unit has a video conversion function. For details on the input and output of the video signals, refer to page 43.

• The AUX VIDEO terminal and S-VIDEO terminal cannot be used at the same time. When using the S-VIDEO terminal, do not connect any component to the VIDEO terminal.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

VCR

Video

projector

OTHERS

NAMES AND

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

IN 1

(

)

IN 5

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

IN 1

IN 2

(

DVD

)

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 4

(

DSS

)

OUT 1

OUT 2

OUT

(

VCR

)

IN 3

(

VCR

)

REC/ZONE B

OUT

IN 1

(

)

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 2

( DVD

)

IN 1

(

)

OUT

DIGITAL AUDIO

IN 1

(

)

IN 4

(

DSS

)

OUT 1

OUT 2

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

IN 1

(

)

IN 2

(

DVD

)

IN 3

(

VCR

)

OUT

(

VCR

)

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 1

(

)

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 2

( DVD

)

IN 1

(

)

OUT

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

IN 1

REC/ZONE B

OUT

DIGITAL AUDIO

IN 1

(

)

IN 3

(

VCR

)

OUT

FUNCTIONS

BASIC CONNECTIONS

ENGLISH

CONNECTING HDMI COMPONENTS

HDMI JACKS

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

It can send digital video and audio signals from BDs and other sources directly to a display. It minimizes signal degradation caused by analog conversion so that high quality images can be enjoyed.

BASIC

This unit is also capable of converting analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video, Component Video) for HDMI output. Select an input source from the GUI menu system. (See page 24) Users can change the allocations made to the unit's HDMI input terminals using the functions. For details, refer to page 24.

Notes

BASIC

• When the HDMI output is connected to a display monitor that does not support HDCP*, signals are not output.

• There may be no image output if connected to a TV or display that is not compatible with the above format.

• Refer to the instruction manual of the TV or display to be connected to the unit for detailed information

* HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection system

ADVANCED

SR6004

SETUP

ADVANCED

To view images in HDMI, it is necessary to connect to a display that supports HDCP.

regarding the HDMI terminal.

Blu-ray disc player

HDMI OUTPUT

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

IN 1

DIGITAL AUDIO

REC/ZONE B

IN 5

OUT

HDMI INPUT

(

)

(

)

IN 1

Video projector Satellite tuner

HDMI INPUT HDMI OUTPUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

IN 2

DVD

IN 3

)

VCR

IN 4

DSS

OUT 1

IN 4

DSS

OUT 2

OUT 1

OUT 2

)

IN 2

IN 1

CONNECTING HDMI COMPONENTS

An HDMI cable (sold separately) is used to connect the HDMI jack on the unit with the HDMI jack on the Bluray disc player, TV, projector or other component. To transmit multichannel audio via HDMI, the connected player must support multichannel audio transmission through its HDMI jack.

Notes

• Some HDMI components can be controlled over the HDMI cable, but this unit cannot control other components this way.

• Some source devices such as DVD players or set top box do not support HDMI repeater operations like those of the unit. In such case, pictures are not properly projected on monitors such as TVs and projectors.

• When multiple components are connected to this unit, turn power to unused components off to prevent interference between them.

• Disconnecting or connecting cables with the power on can damage the equipment. Turn the power off before disconnecting or connecting cables.

• The unit has HDMI input and output terminals that support the following functions.

• Deep Color

• Dolby True HD

• DTS-HD Master Audio

• SACD

• DVD-Audio

• Multi channel PCM signals and audio signals of 64 kHz or higher that are input from the HDMI jack are not output from the DIGITAL OUT jack.

• Depending on the quiality of the cable used, the HDMI signal may be affected by noise.

• The unit does not support HDMI control. However, it is possible to connect the unit between components that do support HDMI control and exercise control by passing the HDMI control signals through the unit. (HDMI control through function)

The HDMI OUT2 terminal of SR6004 does not support the HDMI control through function. When using the

HDMI control through function, use the HDMI OUT1 terminal. All the HDMI input terminals support the

VIDEO

(

)

(

)

(

)

IN 3

DVD

)

VCR

OUT

VCR

IN 3

VCR

IN 1

HDMI control through function.

“HDMI control” is a function for exercising mutual control between components using CEC (Consumer

Electronics Control) as stipulated by the HDMI standard. By connecting components using HDMI cables, linked operations can be performed between the components.

SR5004

TROUBLESHOOTING

Blu-ray disc player TV Satellite tuner

HDMI OUTPUT

OTHERS

IN 1

HDMI OUTPUT

HDMI INPUT

IN 2

DIGITAL AUDIO

(

)

(

)

IN 1

OUT

(

)

(

)

(

)

IN 3

VCR

IN 2

DVD

IN 3

VCR

OUT

REC/ZONE B

IN 4

IN 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

(

)

(

)

IN 3

VCR

IN 2

DVD

IN 1

VIDEO

(

)

(

)

(

)

OUT

VCR

IN 3

VCR

IN 1

ENGLISH

(

)

GNDAMAM

(

)

GND

BASIC CONNECTIONS

CONNECTING THE ANTENNAS

CONNECTING THE SUPPLIED ANTENNAS

The supplied antennas are for indoor use only.

ASSEMBLING THE AM LOOP ANTENNA

Insertting the tabs into the base as shown.

CONNECTING THE AM ANTENNA CABLE

WhiteBlack

GND

(

)

7575Ω

Notes

• During use, extend the FM antenna and move it in various directions until the clearest sound is received. Fix it with push pins or similar implements in that cause the least amount of distortion.

• Set in the direction and position it to where you receive the clearest sound. Put it as far away as possible from the unit, televisions,speaker cables and power cable.

CONNECTING AN OUTDOOR ANTENNAS

If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Keep the antenna from noise sources (neon signes, busy roads, power lines, transformers, etc)

AM Loop Antenna

FM External Antenna

Press and hold Insert wire Release

AM External Antenna

Black

GND

White

16 to 32ft (5 to 10m) Vinyl-coated wire

CONNECTING THE AC POWER CABLE

1. Plug the supplied AC power cable to the AC

IN socket on the rear panel of the unit.

2. Plug the power cable into an AC outlet.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

(

)

7575Ω

Ground

Notes

• Do not remove the AM loop antenna.

• Do not connect the supplied FM antenna.

• The terminal marked “GND” on this unit is not for safety grounding.

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

ENGLISH

BASIC OPERATION

AMP OPERATION

The unit shown in the illustrations is SR6004.

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

ADVANCED

SETUP

OPERATION

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

TURNING ON THE UNIT

1. Turn the power of the equipment connected

to this unit on.

2. Press the POWER ON/OFF button on the

unit. The power of the unit switches on/off each time this button is pressed.

Pressing POWER STANDBY or SOURCE

ON/OFF after pressing the AMP button on the remote controller causes the STANDBY indicator on the unit to light, and the unit to go into standby mode.

To turn the power on while in standby

mode, press the ENTER button on the unit or the AMP button on the remote controller, then press POWER ON or SOURCE ON/ OFF.

SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE

Before you can listen to any input media, you must ﬁ rst select the input source on the unit.

EXAMPLE : DVD

To select DVD, turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob on the front panel or press the DVD button on the remote controller two times in a row. After you have selected DVD, simply turn on the DVD player and play the DVD.

• As the input source is changed, the new input name will appear momentarily an OSD information on the video display. The input name will also appear in the display, on the front-panel.

• If you use the FUNCTION RENAME feature (see page 25) , the renamed name appears on the display.

• As the input is changed, this unit will automatically switch to the digital input, surround mode, attenuation, and night mode status which were entered during the conﬁ guration process for that source.

• When a video source is selected, the selected video signal is output from the MONITOR OUT terminal.

ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOLUME

Adjust the volume to a comfortable level using the VOLUME control knob on the front panel or VOLUME + / – buttons on the remote controller. To increase the volume, turn the VOLUME knob clockwise or press VOLUME + button on the remote controller, to decrease the volume, turn counterclockwise or press VOLUME – button on the remote controller.

Notes

• The volume can be adjusted within the range of

– ∞ and –71 to 18 dB, in steps of 1 dB.

• However, when the channel level is set as described

on page 31, if the volume for any channel is set at +1 dB or greater, the volume cannot be adjusted up to 18 dB.

(In this case the maximum volume adjustment

range is “18 dB - Maximum value of channel level)

ADJUSTING THE TONE (BASS & TREBLE) CONTROL

During a listening session you may wish to adjust the Bass and Treble Control to suit your listening tastes or room acoustics.

(Using the remote controller)

To adjust the tone, press the AMP button. To adjust the bass effect, press BASS + or BASS – button. To adjust the treble effect, TREBLE + or TREBLE – button.

Notes

The tone control function cannot be used in any of the modes listed below.

• Source Direct

• Pure Direct

• 7.1 ch Input

• Dolby Virtual Speaker

• Dolby Headphone

• Dolby True HD

• Dolby Digital Plus

• DTS-HD and 176.4/192 kHz PCM

• Accoustic EQ

• M-DAX

TEMPORARILY TURNING OFF THE SOUND

To temporarily silence all speaker outputs such as when interrupted by a phone call, press the MUTE button on the remote controller. This will interrupt the output to all speakers and the head-phone jack, but it will not affect any recording or dubbing that may be in progress. When the system is muted, the display will show “MUTE” . Press the MUTE button again to return to normal operation.

ENGLISH

BASIC OPERATION

TUNER OPERATION

To operate the unit from the remote controller, press the TUNE button on the remote controller so that the tuner mode is engaged. The unit shown in the illustrations is SR6004.

LISTENING TO THE TUNER

Frequency scan step for AM is selectable. Default setup is 9 kHz step, if your country’s standard is 10 kHz step, Press BAND button on the front panel or BAND button on the remote controller more than 5 seconds. Scan step will change.

Note

• Preset memory for the tuner will clear by changing this setup.

AUTO TUNING

1. 2.3.

2. Press the BAND button to select either FM

or AM.

3. Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front

Panel for more than 1 second to start the auto tuning function.

4. Automatic searching begins then stops

when a station is tuned in.

(Using the remote controller)

1. To select tuner, Press the TUNE button

twice within two second on the remote controller.

2. Press the BAND button to select either FM

or AM.

3. Press and hold the TUNE 3 or 4 button for

1 second or more.

4. Automatic searching begins then stops

when a station is tuned in.

If tuning does not stop at the desired station, use to the “Manual tuning” operation.

MANUAL TUNING

1. 2.3.

(Using the unit)

1. Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select

“TUNER”.

2. Press the BAND button to select either FM

or AM.

3. Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front

Panel to select the desired station.

(Using the remote controller)

1. To select tuner, press the TUNE button

twice within two seconds on the remote controller.

2. Press the BAND button to select either FM

or AM.

3. Press the TUNE 3 or 4 button to tune in the

deseired station.

DIRECT FREQUENCY CALL

(FM) TUNING MODE (AUTO STEREO OR MONO)

When in the auto stereo mode, “AUTO” indicator will be illuminated on the display. The “ST” indicator is illuminated when a stereo broadcast is tuned in. At open frequencies, the noise is muted and the “TUNED” and “ST” indicators are not illuminated. If the signal is weak, it may be difﬁ cult to tune into the station in stereo. In such a case, Press the T.MODE button on the front panel or T.MODE button on the remote controller. “AUTO” indicator is not illuminated, if FM stereo broadcasts are received in monaural and the “ST” indicator is not illuminated. To return to auto stereo mode, Press the T.MODE button on the front panel or T.MODE button on the remote controller again. “AUTO” indicator is illuminated the display.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

(Using the unit)

1. Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select

“TUNER”.

1. To select tuner, press the TUNE button

twice within two seconds on the remote controller.

2. Press the BAND button to select either FM

or AM.

3. Press the F.DIRECT on the remote controller,

display will show “FREQ----”.

4. lnput your desired station’s, frequency with

the ten numbered keypad on the remote controller.

5. The desired station will automatically be

tuned.

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

BASIC OPERATION

REMOTE CONTROLLER OPERATION

To control the unit by your remote controller, you have to select the device AMP or TUNER by pressing the SOURCE button. Please refer below for the details in AMP or TUNER mode.

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

SR6004 SR5004 SR6004 SR5004

OPERATION

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

ADVANCED

SETUP

OPERATION

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

SOURCE ON/OFF POWER OFF Turns the SR5004/6004 off POWER ON Turns the SR5004/6004 on

HDMI ZONE A/B Turns on or off ZONE A or ZONE B

Z.SPKR Turns on or off ZONE SPEAKER A A/D ATT Reduces the input level SPKR A/B Selects the speaker system

7.1 Selects the 7.1CH IN SOURCE AMP Selects AMP mode of remote unit INPUT 3 / 4 DISPLAY Changes the front display mode MUTE Decreases the sound temporarily SURR Selects the surround mode VOLUME +/– Adjusts the over all sound level TOP Back to the TOP of “SETUP MENU” INFO

CURSOR

ENTER MENU Enters the “SETUP MENU”

EXIT Exits from “SETUP MENU” MACRO(M) (RC007SR only) HT-EQ (RC008SR only) AUTO(1) Selects auto surround STEREO(2) Selects STEREO mode P.DIRECT(3) Selects the pure direct mode SLEEP(4) Sets the sleep timer function M-DAX(5) Selects the M-DAX mode EQ(6) Selects the EQ mode LIP SYNC(7) Selects the LIP SYNC mode NIGHT(8) Turns on or off NIGHT mode

D.EQ/VOL(9) T.TONE(CLR) Enters the test tone menu

CH SEL(0) V.OFF(+10) Turns on or off video output

TV POWER Turns the TV on and off TV INPUT Selects the TV video input

TREBLE –/+

BASS –/+

Turns the SR5004/6004 on and off

Switches between HDMI 1 and 2 outputs (SR6004 only)

Switches between the analog and digital inputs

Selects a particular source component

Changes the input selector of SR5004/6004

Displays the current setting on the monitor Moves the cursor for setting in “SETUP MENU” mode Conﬁ rms the setting in “SETUP MENU” mode

Selects the MACRO mode

Turns on or off HT-EQ mode

Selects Audyssey Dynamic EQ Audyssey Dynamic VolumeTM modes

Calls up CH LEVEL ADJUST and adjusts speaker levels or 7.1ch input level

Adjusts the tone control of high frequency sound Adjusts the tone control of low frequency sound

and

TUNER MODEAMP MODE

ZONE A/B AMP function enabled Z.SPKR AMP function enabled A/D AMP function enabled ATT AMP function enabled SPKR A/B AMP function enabled

TUNE 3 / 4 PRESET + 2/– 1 Selects a preset station up and down

EXIT/MEMO

T.MODE P.SCAN Starts preset scan

BAND Selects a radio band T.DISP Selects the display mode in RDS

PTY F.DIRECT Selects the “Frequency direct input”

0-9 Inputs the numeric CLR Clears the inputting TV POWER Turns the TV on and off TV INPUT Selects the TV video input

• Both RC007SR and RC008SR do not have the PRESET code library for this device.

Tunes a frequency station up and down

Enters the tuner preset memory numbers Selects the auto stereo mode or mono mode

Displays the programme type information of the current station

ADVANCED CONNECTIONS

PRE OUT

3IN 3

IN 2

IN 1

(

)

ANTENNA

OFF

FLASHER IN

OUT

MREMOTE CONT.

OUT

LSBL/HL

RSBR/HR

GND AAM

XPort

SPEAKER C

XPort

CCOMPONENT VIDEO

ANALOG AUDIO

7.1CH INPUT

PRE OUT

IN 1

(

)

IN 5

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

IN 1

IN 2

(

DVD

)

(

)

ANTENNA

UAC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

CSWITCHED

0.65A 150W

VCR

DVDBDBD

SBL

OFF

FLASHER IN

ZONE A

DSSTVTV

CD/CDR

OUTININININININ

SBR

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

DC OUT

OUT

SBL/HL

SBR/HR

CAC IN

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 4

(

DSS

)

OUT 1

OUT 2

REC/ZONE B

OUT

SURROUND

CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

GNDAMAM

FRONT B

/HEIGHT

FRONT A

DIGITAL AUDIO

XPort

SPEAKER C

SURROUND

FRONT B

/HEIGHT

FRONT A

CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

OFF

SPEAKER C

OFF

SPEAKER C

ENGLISH

CONNECTING THE USB MEDIA/iPod (SR6004 ONLY)

Connect the USB media/iPod to the unit.

When using USB media, refer to page

47.

Supplied iPod cable

Note

Connect the USB media/iPod while in power off or when the input source is something other than USB. Connecting/disconnecting USB memory when the input source is USB and the power is on may damage the USB memory.

When using an iPod, refer to page 50.

CONNECTING THE WIRELESS RECEIVER

The unit allows the RX101 wireless receiver to be connected. Connect the RX101 to the M-XPort (Marantz-eXtension Port) of the unit.

• When using SR6004, connect the RX101 provided with the unit. When using an SR5004, purchase the RX101 available as an optional accessory, and connect it.

• For the installation and operating procedures, read the operating instructions that come with the RX101.

IN 2

IN 1

MM--XPort

FLASHER IN

Bluetooth device

RX101

SPEAKER C

ANTENNA

RRSRSRSWSWSB

ONONOFF

PRE OUT

(

7575Ω

SLSLC

OUT

)

GND

CONNECTING FOR SPEAKER C USE (BI-AMP CONNECTION)

A bi-amp connection is possible with speakers that have two sets of inputs (for treble and bass). This allows you to drive the treble and bass units with separate channel amps, which enables better sound quality. Connect the speakers as shown in the ﬁ gure. Set the SPEAKER C selector switch on the rear panel to ON.

Notes

• If incorrectly connected, a protective circuit in the unit will trip and set

the unit to standby. (The STANDBY indicator will ﬂ ash.) In such case, recheck the connections between the speakers and the unit.

• Turn power to the unit off before changing the setting of the SPEAKER C selector switch.

• Use speakers that support a bi-amp conﬁ guration.

• When connecting the speakers, be sure to remove their shorting bars.

REC/ZONE B

IN 5

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

IN 1

MM--XPort

SPEAKER C

ONONOFF

ANTENNA

RRSRSRSWSWSBR/HR

PRE OUT

(

7575Ω

SLSLC

FLASHER IN

)

OUT

GND

SBL/HL

SPEAKER C

DIGITAL AUDIO

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

ONONOFF

OUT

7.1CH INPUT

RRL

FRONT B

(

)

IN 1

SBL

CCZONE A

SBR

/HEIGHT

OUT

IN 2

FRONT A

(

DVD

)

IN 3

DVD

LLR

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

(

)

VCR

ANALOG AUDIO

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

(

)

IN 4

DSS

OUT 1

DSS

CD/CDR

OUT

SURROUND

INININININ

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

OUT 2

ADVANCED

OUT

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

CENTER

AC O

230V

SWIT

0.65A

Caution

When the USB devices are used, do not use the USB extension cable.

RIGHT SPEAKER LEFT SPEAKER

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

NAMES AND

NCOMPONENT VIDEO

ANALOG AUDIO

7.1CH INPUT

PRE OUT

IN 1

(

)

IN 5

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

IN 1

IN 2

(

DVD

)

(

)

ANTENNA

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

VCR

DVDBDBD

SBL

OFF

FLASHER IN

ZONE A

DSSTVTV

CD/CDR

OUTININININININ

SBR

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

OUT

SBL/HL

SBR/HR

AC IN

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 4

(

DSS

)

OUT 1

OUT 2

REC/ZONE B

OUT

IN 2(DVD

)

IN 1

(

)

SURROUND

CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

GNDAMAM

FRONT B

/HEIGHT

FRONT A

DIGITAL AUDIO

XPort

SPEAKER C

7.1CH INPUT

SBL

SBR

ANALOG AUDIO

7.1CH INPUT

PRE OUT

IN 1

(

)

IN 5

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

IN 1

IN 2

(

DVD

)

(

)

ANTENNA

VCR

DVDBDBD

SBL

OFF

FLASHER IN

ZONE A

DSS TV

OUTININININININ

SBR

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

OUT

SBL/HL

SBR/HR

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 4

(

DSS

)

OUT 1

REC/ZONE B

OUT

RSURROUND

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

GNDAMAM

FRONT B

/HEIGHT

FRONT A

DIGITAL AUDIO

XPort

SPEAKER C

PRE OUT

SBL/HL

SBR/HR

8CH POWER AMPLIFIER MM8003

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

FUNCTIONS

ADVANCED CONNECTIONS

ENGLISH

CONNECTING MULTI CHANNEL AUDIO COMPONENTS

The 7.1CH INPUT jacks are for multichannel audio source such as the Super Audio CD multichannel player,

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

DVD audio player or external decoder. If you use these jacks, switch on the 7.1CH INPUT and set the 7.1CH INPUT level by using the SETUP MAIN MENU. See page 25.

BASIC

R L R L R L

ADVANCED

FRONT SURR.

SETUP

DVD Audio player

Super Audio CD

Multi channel player

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL POWER AMPLIFIER

The PREOUT jacks are for connecting external power ampliﬁ er. Be sure to connect each speaker to the corresponding external power ampliﬁ er.

Note

The unit's SBL/HL terminal and SBR/HR terminal serve as terminals for surround back speakers, front height speakers and ZONE speaker A.

The sound from either of the three kinds of speakers mentioned above will be output through these terminals.

LR LR

IN 1

(

7575Ω

SLSLC

DIGITAL AUDIO

FLASHER IN

)

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

OUT

GND

SBL/HL

CENTER

MM--XPort

SPEAKER C

SURR.

SUB

BACK

WOOFER

ONONOFF

ANTENNA

RRSRSRSWSWSBR/HR

PRE OUT

OUT

SLSLC

SRSRSW

7.1CH INPUT

RRL

FRONT B

(

)

IN 1

SBL

CCZONE A

SBR

/HEIGHT

OUT

IN 2

FRONT A

(

DVD

)

IN 3

DVD

LLR

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

(

)

VCR

ANALOG AUDIO

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

(

)

IN 4

DSS

OUT 1

OUT 2

DSS

CD/CDR

OUT

SURROUND

INININININ

OUT

CENTER

REC/ZONE B

IN 5

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

COMPONE

(

)

IN 1

AC IN

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

SPEAKER C

ANTENNA

RRSRSRSWSWSBR/HR

RRSRSRSW

IN 1

MM--XPort

ONONOFF

(

7575Ω

SLSLC

PRE OUT

RL RL

IN 3

IN 2

FLASHER IN

REMOTE CONT.

OUT

)

GND

SBL/HL

SBR/HR

IN 4

DIGITAL AUDIO

OUT

REC/ZONE B

IN 5

7.1CH INPUT

RRL

FRONT B

OUT

(

)

IN 1

SBL

CCZONE A

SBR

/HEIGHT

OUT

IN 2

FRONT A

(

DVD

)

IN 3

DVD

LLR

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

(

)

VCR

ANALOG AUDIO

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

(

)

IN 4

DSS

OUT

SUR

R L R L R L

FRONT SURR.

Power

Amplifer

Front Left Front Right

Surround

Back Left

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

Center

Surround Left

SURR. BACK

8CH POWER AMPLIFIER MM8003

Surround

CENTER

Right

Surround Back Right

OTHERS

Powered

Subwoofer

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANALOG AUDIO

7.1CH INPUT

PRE OUT

RS-232C

IN 1

(

)

IN 5

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

IN 1

IN 2

(

DVD

)

(

)

ANTENNA

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

VCR

DVDBDBD

SBL

OFF

FLASHER IN

ZONE A

DSSTVTV

CD/CDR

OUTININININININ

SBR

RSWSW

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

OUT

SBL/HL

SBR/HR

AC IN

MODEL NO. SR6004

IN 3

( VCR

)

IN 4

(

DSS

)

OUT 1

OUT 2

OUT

(

VCR

)

IN 3

(

VCR

)

REC/ZONE B

OUT

IN 1

(

)

MONITOR OUT

IN 4

(

DSS

)

IN 2

(

DVD

)

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 2

( DVD

)

IN 1

(

)

OUT

SURROUND

CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

GNDAMAM

FRONT B

/HEIGHT

FRONT A

DIGITAL AUDIO

XPort

SPEAKER C

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

ZONE A

OUT

REC/ZONE B

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

IN 1

(

)

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

DIGITAL AUDIO

CONNECTING FOR ANOTHER ZONE

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

/ PBCR

/ PR

SR6004 only

ENGLISH

ADVANCED CONNECTIONS

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

LEFT SPEAKER

ZONE

MAIN AMP (For ZONE)

IR Receiver

RIGHT

SPEAKER

ZONE RIGHT SPEAKER

INPUT

RC OUT

(ZONE speaker A)

ZONE A

LEFT

SPEAKER

OPT IN

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

ES7001

BASIC

OPERATION

ZONE B

COMPONENT VIDEO

IN 1

DIGITAL AUDIO

MM--XPort

FLASHER IN

SPEAKER C

ONONOFF

(

)

7575Ω

ANTENNA

SLSLC

RRSRSRSWSWSBR/HR

PRE OUT

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

GND

SBL/HL

OUT

7.1CH INPUT

RRL

FRONT B

(

IN 1

SBL

CCZONE A

SBR

/HEIGHT

)

(

)

(

)

(

VCR

ANALOG AUDIO

RRL

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

IN 4

)

DSS

OUT 1

OUT 2

DSS

CD/CDR

OUT

SURROUND

INININININ

CENTER

IN 2

DVD

IN 3

DVD

ZONE A

OUT

LLR

FRONT A

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

REC/ZONE B

IN 5

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

AC IN

OUT

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

IN 1

(

)

(

)

IN 2

DVD

(

)

IN 3

VIDEO

(

)

(

)

(

)

VCR

OUT

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

(

)

IN 4

DVD

MODEL NO. SR6004

OUT

VCR

(

)

MONITOR OUT

DSS

RS-232C

Notes

• In ZONE A, it is impossible to use HDMI or digital input (optical and coaxial) sources.

In ZONE B, only digital input (optical and

coaxial) sources can be used.

ZONE speaker A cannot be used when the

surround back speakers, front height speakers or speaker C (bi-amp) are being used.

• The surround back speakers, front height speakers or speaker C (bi-amp) cannot be used when ZONE speaker A is being used.

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

NAMES AND

ANALOG AUDIO

7.1CH INPUT

IN 1

(

)

IN 5

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

IN 1

IN 2

(

DVD

)

(

)

ANTENNA

VCR

DVDBDBD

SBL

OFF

FLASHER IN

ZONE A

DSSTVTVCDCD/CDR

OUTININININININ

SBR

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

OUT

SBL/HL

SBR/HR

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 4

(

DSS

)

OUT 1

REC/ZONE B

OUT

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

GNDAMAM

FRONT B

/HEIGHT

FRONT A

DIGITAL AUDIO

XPort

SPEAKER C

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANALOG AUDIO

7.1CH INPUT

PRE OUT

RS-232C

IN 1

(

)

IN 5

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

IN 1

IN 2

(

DVD

)

(

)

ANTENNA

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

VCR

DVDBDBD

SBL

OFF

FLASHER IN

ZONE A

DSSTVTV

CD/CDR

OUTININININININ

SBR

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

OUT

SBL/HL

SBR/HR

AC IN

MODEL NO. SR6004

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 4

(

DSS

)

OUT 1

OUT 2

OUT

(

VCR

)

IN 3

(

VCR

)

REC/ZONE B

OUT

IN 1

(

)

MONITOR OUT

IN 4

(

DSS

)

IN 2

(

DVD

)

IN 3

(

VCR

)

IN 2

(

DVD

)

IN 1

(

)

OUT

SURROUND

CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

GNDAMAM

FRONT B

/HEIGHT

FRONT A

DIGITAL AUDIO

XPort

SPEAKER C

FLASHER IN

OUT

RS-232C

FUNCTIONS

ADVANCED CONNECTIONS

ENGLISH

CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

SPEAKER C

ANTENNA

OPERATION

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

ADVANCED

SETUP

You can control other Marantz products through this unit with the remote controller by connecting the

OPERATION

REMOTE CONTROL terminals on each unit.

ADVANCED

The signal transmitted from the remote controller is received by the remote sensor on this unit. Then the signal is sent to the connected device through this terminal. Therefore you need to aim the remote control only at the unit. Also, if a Marantz power ampliﬁ er (some models excluded) is connected to

TROUBLESHOOTING

one of these terminals, the power ampliﬁ er’s, power switch is synchronized with this unit’s power switch.

Set the REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH on the back of other units (not the SR6004/SR5004) to “EXT.” (EXTERNAL) to use this feature.

OTHERS

IN 2

IN 1

MM--XPort

FLASHER IN

ONONOFF

OUT

(

)

GND

7575Ω

SLSLC

RRSRSRSWSWSBR/HR

REMOTE CONTROL

OUT

IN 3

DIGITAL AUDIO

REMOTE CONT.

SBL/HL

OUT

REC/ZONE B

IN 5

IN 4

7.1CH INPUT

FRONT B

EXTERNAL INTERNAL

(

IN 1

OUT

SBL

CCZONE A

SBR

RRL

/HEIGHT

)

IN 2

OUT

FRONT A

(

)

DVD

IN 3

DVD

LLR

REMOTE CONTROL

OUT

(

)

VCR

ANALOG AUDIO

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

(

)

IN 4

DSS

OUT 1

DSS

RC OUT

OUT

INININININ

SURROUND

DVD playerCD recorder CD player

REMOTE CONTROL

IR Receiver

OUT

EXTERNAL INTERNAL

Whenever external infrared sensors or similar devices are connected to REMOTE IN of the unit, be sure to always disable operation of the infrared sensor on the unit by using the following procedure.

1. Hold down the SURROUND MODE button

and the MENU button on the front panel at the same time for ﬁ ve seconds.

2. The setting “IR=ENABLE” is shown on the

FL DISPLAY.

3. Press the CURSOR buttons (1, 2) to change

this to “IR=DISABLE”.

4. Press the ENTER button. Once this setting

is made, the infrared sensor on the unit is disabled.

Note

• Be sure to set to “IR=ENABLE” when external infrared sensors or similar devices are not connected. Otherwise, the unit will be unable to receive remote control commands.

5. To restore the original setting, perform

steps 1 to 4 to set to “IR=ENABLE”.

CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT

REC/ZONE B

IN 5

IN 4

IN 3

IN 2

IN 1

(

7575Ω

SLSLC

)

FLASHER IN

OUT

GND

DIGITAL AUDIO

OUT

REMOTE CONT.

SBL/HL

MM--XPort

SPEAKER C

ONONOFF

ANTENNA

RRSRSRSWSWSBR/HR

PRE OUT

dsa

a RS-232C

Connect an external control device or other device for servicing. (Use a straight cable for the connection.)

s DC OUT (DC TRIGGER)

External devices can be controlled from the unit by connecting them to the DC OUT terminal (12 V 44mA max).

GND

d FLASHER IN

This unit can be controlled by connecting a control box or other control device to this unit.

GND

7.1CH INPUT

FRONT B

OUT

RRL

(

)

(

)

(

DVD

LLR

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

IN 3

VCR

DVD

ANALOG AUDIO

SURROUND BACK

SPEAKER C

ZONE SPEAKER A

)

IN 1

IN 2

SBL

ZONE A

SBR

OUT

/HEIGHT

FRONT A

+12V

Signal

(

)

IN 4

DSS

OUT 1

OUT 2

VCR

DSS

CD/CDR

OUT

SURROUND

INININININ

OUT

CENTER

COMPONENT VIDEO

AC IN

AC OUTLET

230V 50/60Hz

SWITCHED

0.65A 150W

(

)

(

)

IN 3

VCR

IN 2

DVD

IN 1

VIDEO

(

)

(

)

(

)

OUT

IN 1

(

IN 2

IN 3

)

IN 4

DVD

RS-232C

MODEL NO. SR6004

OUT

VCR

(

)

MONITOR OUT

DSS

SETUP

ENGLISH

After all components are connected, initial setup must be performed.

GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE (GUI) MENU SYSTEM

This unit incorporates the graphical user interface menu system, which makes various operations possible by using the cursor (3, 4, 1 , 2) and ENTER buttons on the remote controller or on the front panel.

Note

• To view the graphical user interface displays, make certain you have connected the MONITOR OUT jack on the rear panel to the composite, component video or HDMI input of your TV or projector. (See page 13, 14)

1. Press the AMP button on the remote

controller. (This step is not needed when operating the setup menus from the unit.)

2. Press the MENU button on the remote

controller or press the MENU button on the front panel. The “Main Menu” of the GUI menu system is displayed.

There are 6 items in the “Main Menu”.

3. Select the desired sub-menu with the 3

or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button. The display will change to the selected sub-menu.

LOCKING SUBMENUS

(1) Move the cursor to “Input Setup” in the Main

Menu.

(2) When the 1 or 2 cursor button is pressed to

display the concerned is locked.

4. To returns the Main MENU of the GUI menu

system, press the TOP button.

5. To exit from the GUI menu system, press

the EXIT button, or move the cursor to EXIT and press the ENTER button.

Note

• After you complete this portion of the setup, move cursor to “Return” with the 3 and 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

(key) icon on an item, the item

Input Setup

Function Input Setup

7.1ch Input Setup Function Rename

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : Select Exit : Exit

“1. Input Setup” (P. 24)

Speaker Setup

Auto Setup

Manual Setup

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : Select Exit : Exit

“2. Speaker Setup” (P. 26)

Video Setup

Video Convert

OSD Information HDMI Output HDMI Output Resolution Component Output Component I / P Convert

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : Select Exit : Exit

“4. Video Setup” (SR6004) (P. 34)

RC007SR/RC008SR BUTTON CONTROL

TOP button

LEFT button

MENU button

: Enable : Output1 : Auto : Main Zone : Disable

Main Menu

Input Setup

Speaker Setup Surround Setup Video Setup Preference Acoustic EQ

: Up / Down : Lock / Unlock Enter : Select Exit : Exit

Surround Setup

Channel Level

PL x Music Parameter CS Parameter NEO: 6 Parameter HT-EQ LFE Level M-DAX

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : Select Exit : Exit

: Off : 0dB : Off

“3. Surround Setup” (P. 32)

SR6004 SR5004

Video Setup

Video Convert

OSD Information HDMI Output Resolution Component I / P Convert

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : Select Exit : Exit

: Enable : Auto : Disable

“4. Video Setup” (SR5004) (P. 34)

SR6004/SR5004 FRONT BUTTON CONTROL

AMP button

MENU button

LEFT button

UP button ENTER button

RIGHT button

EXIT button DOWN button

Preference

Zone A Setup

Zone B Setup DC Trigger Setup Optical Output Standby Mode Audio HDMI Audio HDMI Lip Sync

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : Select Exit : Exit

: Rec : Normal : Main : Enable : Disable

“5. Preference” (P. 35)

Acoustic EQ

EQ. Mode

Adjust User EQ Check Audyssey MultEQ

Audyssey Dynamic EQ : Off Audyssey Dynamic EQ Adj. Audyssey Dynamic Volume : Off

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

: Off

: 0dB

“6. Acoustic EQ” (P. 37)

UP button

DOWN button

EXIT button

RIGHT button

ENTER button

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS SETUP

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

SETUP

1 INPUT SETUP

This menu is for setting the matching the output

CONNECTIONS

of connected audio devices and the input jacks of this unit.

BASIC

• Function Input Setup :

“1-1 FUNCTION INPUT SETUP”

• 7.1ch Input Setup :

OPERATION

“1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP” (see page 25)

BASIC

• Function Rename :

“1-3 FUNCTION RENAME” (see page 25)

1. Select “Input Setup” from the Main Menu

ADVANCED

with 3 or 4 cursor button, and press the

CONNECTIONS

ENTER button.

2. Select the desired sub-menu with the 3

or 4 cursor buttons, and press the ENTER button.

SETUP

OPERATION

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERSSETUP

Input Setup

Function Input Setup

7.1ch Input Setup Function Rename

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : Select Exit : Exit

P. 25

☞

7.1ch Input Setup

Video-in

Front Left Center Front Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left Subwoofer

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

P. 25

☞

Function Rename

Function : BLU-RAY

BLU - RAY

Rename :

;

Space Backspace Default

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

: Last

: 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB

(

)

[

]

{

}

1-1 FUNCTION INPUT SETUP (ASSIGNABLE DIGITAL INPUT)

The digital inputs can be assigned to a desired source. HDMI and component inputs can be assigned to the preferred source. Use this menu to select which digital input jacks are to be assigned to which input source.

1. Select “Function Input Setup” from the

Input Setup menu with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Function Input Setup

Mode

Digital

Function

BLU-RAY

CD/CDR

M-XPort

Function

BLU-RAY

CD/CDR

M-XPort

Auto Auto

DVD

Auto

VCR

Auto

DSS

Auto

Auto Auto

AUX

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : Return Exit : Exit

Function Input Setup

DVD

VCR DSS

AUX

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : Return Exit : Exit

Mode

Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Auto Auto

1 5 3 4 2

Front

Digital

3 4 2

Front

HDMI

1 2 3 4

HDMI

1 2 3

2. Select a setting with the 3, 4, 1, and 2

cursor buttons, and assign a mode and input jack (Digital, HDMI, Comp).

Mode

Auto:

Select “Auto”, for automatic detection of the digital input signal condition. If there is no digital signal, but there is an analog signal present, the analog signal will be played. “Auto” is the initial setting of all input sources.

HDMI:

Select “HDMI”, when only a HDMI signal will be used.

Comp.

1 2 3

Comp.

1 2 3

SR6004

Video

1 2 3

4 Last Last

(Front)

Last

SR5004

Video

4 Last Last

(Front)

Last

Digital:

Select “Digital”, when only a digital signal will be used.

Analog:

Select “Analog” for input sources for which no digital input jacks are used.

Digital

The digital inputs can be assigned to a desired source. Assign the number of a digital input jack to the device.

HDMI

Assign the number of an HDMI input jack to the device.

Note

• When FUNCTION MODE is set to HDMI and HDMI AUDIO of “5. PREFERENCE” is set to Through, audio is not output from the unit. (See page 35)

Comp.

Assign the number of a component video input jack to the device.

Video

Assign the number of a composite video and Svideo input jack to the device.

Note

• Video can use the same numbers when assigning to input functions.

• The ✽ mark in AUX indicates that other inputs cannot be assigned.

3. Press the ENTER button.

4. Select each mode setting and input terminal

with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

5. Press the ENTER button.

6. Repeat steps 2-5 until all items are set.

Note

• Assignments cannot be made in sections with a ( ) mark.

1-2 7.1CH INPUT SETUP

This menu is for adjusting the speaker levels for 7.1channel input sources. Here you will adjust the volume for each channel so that they are all heard by the listener at the same level.

1. Select “7.1ch Input Setup” from the Input

Setup menu with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

7.1ch Input Setup

Video-in

Front Left Center Front Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left Subwoofer

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

2. Select “Video-in” with the 3 or 4 cursor

buttons.

3. Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, select the

video input source to be played through the MONITOR OUT jack.

The input source is switched by pressing the

1 or 2 cursor buttons as follows;

Last ↔ BLU-RAY ↔ DVD ↔ VCR ↔ DSS

↔ TV ↔ CD/CDR ↔ AUX ↔ M-XPort ↔ Video-off ↔Last ↔...

Notes

• When “Last” is selected, the source is set to the source selected before the 7.1 ch input menu was activated.

• When “Video-off” is selected, no signal is emitted from MONITOR OUT jack.

4. Select desired channel with the 3 or 4

cursor buttons.

5. Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, adjust the

volume level of each channel.

: Last

: 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB

Note

• The volume level can be set between -12 dB and +12 dB in 0.5 dB increments on all channels except the subwoofer (SUB W), which can be set from -18dB to +12 dB in 0.5 dB increments.

1-3 FUNCTION RENAME

Input sources can be registered under any name. This menu is for renaming input source. This menu is for renaming function name. Names can be up to 10 characters long, including spaces. (Characters are selected from those appearing on the display.) This name appears on the unit's FL display and the GUI, but it does not appear in the GUI Setup menu.

1. Select “Function Rename” from the Input

Setup menu with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Function Rename

Function : BLU-RAY

Rename :

B L

U-RAY

;

Space Backspace Default Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

(

)

[

]

2. Select “Function” with the 3 or 4 cursor

buttons.

3. Select an input source with the 1 or 2

cursor buttons.

4. Select “Rename” with the 3 or 4 cursor

buttons.

5. Move the cursor to the character (1st to

10th) to change with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

6. Move the cursor to the character list with

the 4 cursor button. (Move the cursor to the letter “A” to begin with.)

7. Select a character with the 3, 4, 1, and 2

cursor buttons.

8. Press the ENTER button to enter the

selected letter.

9. Repeat steps 5-8 until the new name is

input.

{

}

ENGLISH

SETUP

Space:

Inserts a space at the cursor point of the “Rename” area.

Backspace:

Deletes the character left of the cursor in the “Rename” area one character at a time.

Default:

Restores the name in the “Rename” area to the name in the “Function” area.

Note

• Rename cannot be left blank.

Move the cursor to “Return” with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to go

to the Input Setup menu.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

Move the cursor to “Return” with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor buttons, and press the ENTER button to go

to the Input Setup menu.

OTHERS SETUP

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

SETUP

2 SPEAKER SETUP

After you have installed the unit connected all the

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

components and determined the speaker layout, it is now time to perform the settings in the Speaker Setup menu for the optimum sound acoustics for

BASIC

your environment and speaker layout. Before you perform the following settings, it is important that you ﬁ rst determine the following characteristics:

• Auto Setup:

BASIC

“2-1 AUTO SETUP (Audyssey MultEQ®)” (see page 27)

• Manual Setup:

“2-2 MANUAL SETUP” (see page 30)

ADVANCED

1. Select “Speaker Setup” from the Main

Menu with 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

2. Select the desired menu with the 3 or

4 cursor buttons, and press the ENTER

button.

SETUP

Note

• After you complete this the portion of the setup, press the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor button. The cursor will move to “Return” and press the ENTER button to go to the Sub-menu.

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

Speaker Setup

Auto Setup

Manual Setup

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : Select Exit : Exit

P. 27

☞

Audyssey MultEQ Setup

StartManual Setup

Front Height Surround Back

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : OK Exit : Exit

Audyssey MultEQ Setup

Cancel

: : Enter : OK Exit : Exit

Audyssey MultEQ Setup

Start

Check Calculate

: Up / Down : Enter : OK Exit : Exit

Speaker Check :

1st Mic Position Now Analyzing!!

Speaker Check : OK

2nd Mic Position

: Yes : 2ch

- -

Audyssey MultEQ Setup

Now Analyzing!!

Cancel

: : Enter : OK Exit : Exit

Audyssey MultEQ Setup

--------------

Now Calculating!

: : Enter : Exit :

Check Result

Speakers Config

Speakers Size Speakers Distance Channel Level Crossover Frequency Store

: Up / Down : Enter : Select Exit : Exit

P. 30

☞

Manual Setup

Speakers Size

Speakers Distance Speakers Level

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : Select Exit : Exit

Speakers Size

Subwoofer

Front

Front Height Center Surround Surround Back

Surround Back Size

LPF / HPF

Bass Mix

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

Speakers Distance Unit

Front Left

Front Height Left Center Front Height Right Front Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left Subwoofer Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

Speakers Level

Test ModeFront Left

Front Left Front Height Left Center Front Height Right Front Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left Subwoofer Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

: Yes

: Small

: Small : Small : Small : 2ch

: Small

: 80Hz

: * * *

: Meters

: 3.05 m

: 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m

: Manual

: 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB

2-1 AUTO SETUP (AUDYSSEY MULTEQ®)

AUTO SETUP (performed by Audyssey MultEQ) automatically measures the acoustical problems in the listening environment and optimizes settings to create the best audio experience for your listening environment.

Audyssey MultEQ removes frequency response anomalies caused by the interaction of sound from loudspeakers within the room. This results in the playback of sound as it was intended, without coloration, not just in one seat, but over a large listening area. Audyssey MultEQ measures up to 6 listening positions in the room, detects the presence of each speaker, and automatically calculates the speaker size, channel level, distance, and optimal crossover frequency settings. To set up the speaker system (i.e., adjusting speaker distance, etc.) without using the AUTO SETUP feature, see “MANUAL SETUP” on page 30 of the manual.

OTHERSSETUP

HOW TO PERFORM AUTO SETUP (AUDYSSEY MULTEQ

During this setup process, a GUI menu displays important instructions. So be sure to connect and power on the monitor to view the GUI instructions.

1. Connect the supplied microphone to the

SETUP MIC jack on the unit.

2. Set the microphone in the main listening

position.

Notes

• Up to 6 positions around the main listening position can be measured.

For the ﬁ rst measurement, set the microphone in

the main listening position.

• Use a stand or tripod to position the microphone at ear height for all listening positions measured with the microphone tip pointing directly up to the ceiling.

• Remove any obstructions between the speakers and microphone.

• When using a powered subwoofer, set the level knob to the middle or 12 o'clock position. Set the crossover to off, or to its highest value.

If the subwoofer has a standby, or sleep mode,

disable it. Not doing so could affect the test signal which may result in inaccurate subwoofer measurements.

)

• During measurements, do not stand between the microphone and the speakers. Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt the room measurements. Close windows, silence cell phones, televisions, radios, air conditioners, ﬂ uorescent lights, home appliances, light dimmers, or other devices.

Cell phones should be placed away from all audio

electronics during the measurement process as Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) may cause measurement disruptions (even if the cell phone is not in use).

It is suggested to operate the AUTO SETUP via

the remote controller rather than by front panel.

• The test tones played through each channel increase level as needed in order to overcome ambient noise present in the listening environment and obtain the best signal to noise ratio.

3. Select “Speaker Setup” from the Main

Menu, select “Auto Setup” with the 3/4 cursor buttons, and press the ENTER button to display the start screen.

4. Select the number of channels of the

surround back speakers which are being used and whether height speakers are part of the system. When a 5.1-channel configuration is used for the speaker systems, select “NONE” (no surround back speakers and no front height speakers). (See page 21, 35.)

Select “Start” with the 3/4 cursor buttons

and press the ENTER button to start measurement.

Audyssey MultEQ Setup

StartManual Setup

Front Height Surround Back

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : OK Exit : Exit

: Yes : 2ch

5. “1st Mic Position Check” The main listening position refers to the most

central position where one would normally sit within the listening environment. MultEQ uses the measurements from this position to calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.

Audyssey MultEQ Setup

Speaker Check : -

1st Mic Position

Now Analyzing!!

Cancel

: : Enter : OK Exit : Exit

Note

• The Speakers Check detects the presence of connected speakers. If a channel is not used, the SPEAKERS CHECK will try to detect it, then continue to the next channel.

6. When the 1st Mic Position Check ends, the

following GUI appears on the display.

Audyssey MultEQ Setup

Speaker Check : OK

2nd Mic Position

Start

Check Calculate

: Up / Down : Enter : OK Exit : Exit

Here, to view the results of the detection

check, select “Check” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button. The results will be displayed.

ENGLISH

SETUP

Speakers Configuration Check Speaker Results Front Left

Front Height Left Center Front Height Right

Front Right Surround Right

Surround Back

Surround Left Subwoofer

Return

: : Enter : Return Exit : Exit

If Check Speaker Results indicates an error,

address the issue of the noted speaker and remeasure. (For error messages, see “ERROR MESSAGES” on page 29.)

After conﬁ rming the check results, select

“Return” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to return to the GUI menu.

At this point, you can select “Exit” to

end Auto Setup and return to “Speaker Setup”.

Note

• Auto Setup is not available in Pure Direct, Source Direct, or 7.1 Channel Input modes.

7. Move the microphone to the 2nd listening

position, select “Start” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to measure the 2nd point. At this point, you can cancel second point measurement and calculate measurement results by selecting “Calculate” and pressing the

ENTER button.

Audyssey MultEQ Setup

Start Check

Calculate

: Up / Down : Enter : OK Exit : Exit

: Yes

: No : No : No

: Yes : Yes

: No

: Yes : Yes

Speaker Check : OK

2nd Mic Position

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS SETUP

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

SETUP

8. Repeat step 7 until measuring up to 6 points

measuring the main listening position and other positions where people will

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

commonly listen.

When all measurements end, the following

GUI appears on the display.

Audyssey MultEQ Setup

Calculate

OPERATION

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

ADVANCED

: : Enter : OK Exit : Exit

Select “Calculate” with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the ENTER button to calculate measurement results. During calculations, the following GUI appears on the display.

Audyssey MultEQ Setup

SETUP

OPERATION

ADVANCED

: : Enter : Exit :

TROUBLESHOOTING

Notes

• Fewer than 6 positions may be measured, but it is recommended to measure in all 6 positions for best results. Measuring in fewer than 3 position is not recommended as it does not provide enough acoustical information for good correction.

• The time needed to complete calculations depends on the number of connected speakers and

OTHERSSETUP

measured listening positions. The more speakers and listening positions, the more time is needed.

Speaker Check : OK

--------------

Now Calculating!

9. Checking Measurement Results When calculations for the measurement

results end, a screen appears for conﬁ rming the calculation results.

Check Result

Speakers Configuration

Speakers Size Speakers Distance Channel Level Crossover Frequency Store

: Up / Down : Enter : Select Exit : Exit

Select items to check with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the ENTER button to enter them.

Note

To check equalizer (MultEQ

) parameters, see

page 37.

[Example]

Conﬁ rmation screen for speaker detection

Speakers Configuration Check Speaker Results Front Left

Front Height Left Center Front Height Right

Front Right Surround Right

Surround Back

Surround Left Subwoofer

Return

: : Enter : Return

: Yes

: No : No : No

: Yes : Yes

: No

: Yes : Yes

Exit : Exit

[Example]

Conﬁ rmation screen for speaker size.

Speakers Size Front Left Front Height Left Center Front Height Right Front Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left

Return

: : Enter : Return

: Auto : Auto : Auto : Auto : Auto : Auto : Auto : Auto : Auto

Exit : Exit

[Example]

Conﬁ rmation screen for the distance from speakers to the listening position

Speakers Distance Unit Front Left Front Height Left Center Front Height Right Front Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left Subwoofer

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : Return

The units can be changed by moving the cursor

: Meters : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m

Exit : Exit

to Meters of Unit and pressing 1 / 2 the cursor buttons. Each time a 1 / 2 cursor button is pressed, the units alternate between Feet and Meters.

Note

This system cannot measure a distance of 9.15 m (30.0 ft) or higher. In this case, >9.15 m (>30.0 ft) is displayed.

[Example]

Conﬁ rmation screen for channel level.

Channel Level Front Left Front Height Left Center Front Height Right Front Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left Subwoofer

Return

: : Enter : Return Exit : Exit

: 0.0dB : 0.0dB : -6.5dB : 0.0dB : -1.5dB : +1.0dB : +9.5dB : +12.0dB : -2.5dB : -12.5dB

[Example]

Conﬁ rmation screen for crossover frequency.

Crossover Frequency Front Front Height Center Surround Surround Back

Return

: : Enter : Return

: Auto : Auto : Auto : Auto : Auto

Exit : Exit

* Auto is displayed to indicate that the speaker

size and crossover frequency results were automatically measured.

10. Storing Measurement Results in Memory

Once ﬁ nished conﬁ rming the measurement

results, select “Return” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to display the Check Result screen.

Check Result Speakers Configuration Speakers Size Speakers Distance Channel Level Crossover Frequency

Store

: Up / Down : Enter : OK Exit : Exit

Place the cursor on “Store” and press the ENTER button to store all parameters including the equalizer parameters in memory. If not wanting to store the calculation results in memory, press the Exit button.

Note

Pressing “Exit” prior to pressing “Store” erases all measurement results and calculation results, therefore operate the remote controller with care.

When storing operations end, the following GUI appears on the display.

Speaker Setup

Auto Setup

Manual Setup

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : Select Exit : Exit

Note

•

Do not turn the power to the unit off while storing parameters in memory. This may erase or corrupt data in the unitʼs memory and may damage the unit.

ERROR MESSAGES

Mic Setup Error!!

Displayed Error Cause How to Remedy

Audyssey MultEQ Setup

Start Front Height Surround Back

Return

Mic Setup Error Check Microphone

: Yes : 2ch

• The microphone is not properly connected. • Connect the included microphone.

• Check the microphone connection.

ENGLISH

SETUP

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

Noise Error!!

Analyze Error!! * Under Analyze Error, select

“Result” with the 3 /4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button. A detail screen like the following appears on the display.

: : Enter : Exit : Exit

Audyssey MultEQ Setup

Speaker Check :

: : Enter : Exit : Exit

Audyssey MultEQ Setup

Speaker Check :

Analyze Error!!

Result

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : Return Exit : Exit

Speakers Configuration Check Speaker Results Front Left

Front Height Left Center Front Height Right

Front Right

Surround Right

Surround Back Right Surround Back Left

Surround Left Subwoofer

Return

: : Enter : Return

Noise Error!!

: Yes

: No : No : No

: Yes

: No

: Yes Err : Yes Err

: No : Yes

* *

Rev

Exit : Exit

• There is too much noise in the listening room to measure properly.

• Volume from the speakers is low.

• The speakers required for suitable playback were not detected.

• Speaker polarity is connected backwards.

In the examples at left, the following trouble is detected.

• The polarity of the left and right channels of the front speakers is backwards ([Rev] appears on the display.)

• The surround speaker is not connected ([No] is displayed), but the surround back speaker is connected.

An error is indicated in addition to the above if the speakers are connected as follows.

• When using just one surround back speaker, but it is connected to the surround back R-channel

(To use just one surround back speaker, connect it to the

L-channel.)

• During measurement, turn off devices that make noise such as air conditioners.

• Measure at a time when the surrounding area is quiet.

• Power off the unit and check the speakers that are indicated as reversed polarity.

([Rev] may appear with some speakers even if properly

connected. If you are certain the wiring is correct, ignore the error indication and continue.)

• Check speaker direction and layout

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS SETUP

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

SETUP

ENGLISH

2-2 MANUAL SETUP

1. Select “Speaker Setup” from the Main

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

ADVANCED

SETUP

OPERATION

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERSSETUP

Menu.

2. Select “Manual Setup” with the 3 or 4

cursor buttons.

3. Press the ENTER button to enter the

selection.

Manual Setup

Speakers Size

Speakers Distance Speakers Level

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : Select Exit : Exit

4. Select the sub-menu with the 3 or 4 cursor

button, and press the ENTER button.

5. Select Speaker Size with the 3 or 4 cursor

button from the Manual Setup menu, and press the ENTER button.

Speakers Size

Subwoofer

Front

Front Height Center Surround Surround Back

Surround Back Size

LPF / HPF

Bass Mix

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

When setting the speaker size in the Speaker Size menu, use the guidelines below.

Large:

The complete frequency range for the channel you are setting will be output from the speaker.

: Yes

: Small

: Small : Small : Small : 2ch

: Small

: 80Hz

: * * *

Small:

Frequencies of the channel you are setting that are lower than approx. 80 Hz will be output from the subwoofer. If the Subwoofer is set to “No” and the front speakers are set to “Large”, then the sound will be output from both the left and right speakers.

Subwoofer

Yes:

Select when a subwoofer is connected.

No:

Select when a subwoofer is not connected.

Front

Large:

Select if the front speakers are large.

Small:

Select if the front speakers are small.

Note

• If “No” is selected for the subwoofer setting, then this setting is ﬁ xed at “Large.”

Front Height

None:

Select if no front height speaker is connected.

Large:

Select if the front height speaker is large.

Small:

Select if the front height speaker is small.

Note

• If “Zone SPKR” is selected for Surround Back speakers, then this setting is ﬁ xed to “None”.

Center

None:

Select if no center speaker is connected.

Large:

Select if the center speaker is large.

Small:

Select if the center speaker is small.

Surround

None:

Select if no surround speakers are connected.

Large:

Select if the surround speakers are large.

Small:

Select if the surround speakers are small.

Surround Back

None:

Select if no surround back speakers are connected.

1ch:

Select if one surround back speaker is connected. In this case, the audio signal is emitted from the SURR BACK LEFT SPEAKER terminal.

2ch:

Select if the surround back left and right speakers are connected.

Zone SPKR:

Select if using the SURROUND BACK SPEAKER terminal as ZONE SPEAKER A.

Note

• If “None” is selected for the Surround setting, then this setting is ﬁ xed to “None.”

Surround Back Size

Large:

Select if the surround back speakers are large.

Small:

Select if the surround back speakers are small.

Note

• If “None” is selected for the Surround setting, then this setting is not available.

LPF/HPF

When you use a subwoofer, you can select the cutoff frequency for the small speakers used. Select one of the crossover frequency levels according to the size of the small speakers connected. 40Hz → 60Hz → 80Hz → 100Hz → 120Hz → 140Hz → 160Hz → 180Hz

Note

• If using small front speakers, set a slightly higher frequency. If using large front speakers, set a slightly lower frequency.

Bass Mix

• The bass mix setting is only valid when “Large” is set for the front speakers and “Yes” is set for the subwoofer during stereo playback.

This setting has effect only during playback of

PCM or analog stereo sources.

• When “Both” is selected, the low frequencies will be played through the main L&R speakers and the subwoofer.

In this playback mode, the low frequency range

expands more uniformly throughout the room, but depending on the size and shape of the room, interference may result in a decrease of the actual volume of the low frequency range.

• By selecting “Mix”, the low frequencies will play through the main L&R only.

Note

• LFE signals during playback of Dolby Digital or

DTS will be played through the subwoofer.

6. Select each speaker with the 3 or 4 cursor

buttons.

7. Set the size of each speaker with the 1 or 2

cursor buttons.

8. After you complete this portion of the

setup, move the cursor to “Return” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to display the Manual Setup screen.

ENGLISH

SETUP

9. Select Speaker Distance with the 3 or

4 cursor button from the Manual Setup

menu, and press the ENTER button.

Speakers Distance Unit

Front Left

Front Height Left Center Front Height Right Front Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left Subwoofer Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

: Meters

: 3.05 m

: 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m : 3.05 m

Use this menu to specify the distance of each speaker’s position from the listening position. The delay time is automatically calculated according to these distances. Begin by determining the ideal or most commonly used seating position in the room. This is important for the timing of the acoustics to create the proper sound space that the unit and today’s sound systems are able to produce.

Note

• For speakers for which you have selected “None”, the speaker configuration sub-menu will not appear here.

10. Select either Meters or Feet for Unit with

the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

11. Select each speaker with the 3 or 4 cursor

buttons.

12. Set the distance for each speaker , press the

1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Front Left:

Set the distance from the front left speaker to your normal listening position.

Front Height Left:

Set the distance from the front height left speaker to your normal listening position.

Center:

Set the distance from the center speaker to your normal listening position.

Front Right:

Set the distance from the front right speaker to your normal listening position.

Front Height Right:

Set the distance from the front height right speaker to your normal listening position.

Surround Left:

Set the distance from the surround left speaker to your normal listening position.

Surround Right:

Set the distance from the surround right speaker to your normal listening position.

Subwoofer:

Set the distance from the subwoofer to your normal listening position.

Surround Back Left:

Set the distance from the surround back left speaker to your normal listening position.

Surround Back Right:

Set the distance from the surround back right speaker to your normal listening position.

Notes

• Set the distance to each speaker in meters (m) or feet (ft) as follows.

m: 0.03 - 9.15 m in 0.03 m steps ft: 0.1 - 30.0 ft in 0.1 ft steps (The values appearing on the FL display are

approximate.)

• For the speakers that you have selected “No” the speaker size menu will not appear.

• The setting for Surround Back Left and Surround Back Right appears if it is set, two surround back speakers in the Speaker Size menu.

• The setting of Surround Back appears if it is set for one surround back speaker in the Speaker Size menu.

13. After you complete this portion of the

setup, move the cursor to “Return” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to display the Manual Setup screen.

14. Select Speakers Level with the 3 or 4

cursor button from the Manual Setup menu, and press the ENTER button.

Speakers Level

Test ModeFront Left

Front Left Front Height Left Center Front Height Right Front Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left Subwoofer Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

: Manual

: 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB

Here you can set the volume for each speaker so that they are all heard by the listener at the same level. We recommend holding a dB SPL (Sound Pressure Level) meter at the listening position, at arms length, and pointing straight up at the ceiling, adjust the level of each speaker in turn unit it reads 75dB SPL when the meter is set to “C” weighting and Slow responce.

Note

• The speaker level settings are not available in

7.1 Channel Input mode, Pure Direct mode and Source Direct mode.

Test tone:

Select “Manual” or “Auto” generation of the test tone with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

If you select “Auto”, the test tone will be cycled through in a circular pattern beginning at Front

Left → Front Height Left → Center → Front Height Right → Front Right → Surround Right

→ Surround Back Right → Surround Back Left → Surround Left → Subwoofer → Front Left, in 2

seconds increments for each channel. Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, adjust the volume level of the noise from the speaker so that it is the same level for all the speakers.

If you select “Manual”, adjust the output level of each speaker as listed below.

15. Move the cursor to Front Left by pressing

the 4 cursor button. This unit will emit a pink noise from the front left speaker.

Remember the level of this noise and then

press the 4 cursor button.

(Note that this can be adjusted to any

level between -12 and +12 dB in 0.5 dB increments.)

This unit will now emit the pink noise from

the center speaker.

16. Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, adjust the

volume level of the noise from the center speaker so that it is the same level as the front left speaker.

17. Press the 4 cursor button again. This unit

will now emit the pink noise from the front right speaker.

18. Repeat steps 17 and 18 for the front right

and other speakers until all speakers are adjusted to the same volume level.

After you complete this portion of the setup, press the ENTER button to move the cursor to “Return”. Press the ENTER button to go to “Manual Setup”.

Notes

• Speakers for which you selected “None” in the Speaker Size menu will not appear.

• Surround Back Left and Surround Back Right appear if it is set for two surround back speakers in the Speaker Size menu.

• Surround Back appears if it is set for one surround back speaker in the Speaker Size menu.

• To adjust the speaker levels for 7.1 channel input sources, you will need to use the 7.1 ch Input sub menu. (See page 25)

• Subwoofer can be set from –18dB to +12dB.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS SETUP

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

SETUP

3 SURROUND SETUP

This menu is for setting surround effect parameters

CONNECTIONS

for the various surround input signals so as to bring out the live audio effect of your speaker system.

BASIC

1. Select “Surround Setup” from the Main

Menu with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

2. Select the desired menu with the 3 or

4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER

OPERATION

BASIC

button.

• Channel level:

“3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL” (see page 32)

• PLIIx Music Parameter:

“3-2 PLIIx MUSIC PARAMETER” (see page 33)

CONNECTIONS

• CSII Parameter:

ADVANCED

“3-3 CSII PARAMETER” (see page 33)

• NEO:6 Parameter:

“3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER” (see page 33)

• HT-EQ:

Select to active the HT-EQ with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

SETUP

The total balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home. This is because ﬁ lm soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theater environments.

OPERATION

Activating the HT-EQ feature when watching a ﬁ lm

ADVANCED

made for movie theaters corrects this and restores the correct tonal balance. The HT-EQ feature is available except in the following modes.

• 7.1 CH INPUT

TROUBLESHOOTING

• PURE DIRECT

• SOURCE DIRECT

• Dolby Head Phone

• When VIRTUAL is set for the surround mode

• LFE Level:

Select the output level of the LFE signal included in the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal.

OTHERSSETUP

Select “0dB”, “–10 dB” or “OFF” with the 1 or 2 cursor button.

• M-DAX:

Select the desired M-DAX mode. Select “High”, “Low” or “Off” with the 1 or 2 cursor button. (See page 40)

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “Return” with the 3, 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Surround Setup

Channel Level

PL x Music Parameter CS Parameter NEO: 6 Parameter HT-EQ LFE Level M-DAX

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : Select Exit : Exit

P. 32

☞

Channel Level

Surround Mode

Front Height Left Center Front Height Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left Subwoofer

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

P. 33

☞

PL x Music Parameter

ParameterCenter

Panorama Dimension Center Width

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

: Off : 0dB : Off

: Auto

: 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB

: Default

: Off : 0 : 3

P. 33

☞

CS Parameter

TrubassCenter

SRS Dialog

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

P. 33

☞

NEO: 6 Parameter

Center Gain

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

: 0

: 0.3

3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL

1. Select “Surround Setup” from Main Menu

with 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

2. Select “Channel Level” with the 3 or

4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER

button.

3. Set the Surround Mode with the 1 or 2

cursor buttons.

Channel Level

Surround Mode

Front Height Left Center Front Height Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left Subwoofer

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

4. Select the desired menu item with the 3 or

4 cursor buttons, set the desired level with

the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, and press the ENTER button.

Surround Mode:

The surround mode can be independently set for 3 modes.

1. Multi Ch STEREO

2. CSII

3. Others

CHANNEL LEVEL

Center:

Set the effect level of the center speaker between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “None” was selected for the center speaker setting in the Speaker Size, then this setting will not appear.

Surround Left or Right:

Set the effect level of the Surround speaker between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “None” was selected for the surround speakers setting in the Speaker Size, then this setting will not appear.

: Auto

: 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB

Surround Back Left or Right:

Set the effect level of the Surround Back speaker between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “None” was selected for the surround back speakers setting in the Speaker Size, then this setting will not appear.

Front Height Left or Right:

Set the effect level of the front height speaker between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “None” was selected for the front height speakers setting in the Speaker Size, then this setting will not appear.

Subwoofer:

Set the effect level of the subwoofer speaker between –18 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “No” was selected for the subwoofer speaker setting in the Speaker Size, then this setting will not appear.

Note

• Setting to a mode other than multichannel stereo or CSII will affect the speaker level as explained in “2-2 MANUAL SETUP”.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “Return” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to go to the Surround Setup menu.

ENGLISH

SETUP

3-2 PLIIx (PRO LOGIC II x) MUSIC PARAMETER

Pro LogicIIx-Music mode creates a rich and enveloping surround ambience from stereo sources such as CDs. In this mode, this unit includes three controls to ﬁ netune the sound ﬁ eld as follows.

1. Select “Surround Setup” in Main Menu

with 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

2. Select “PLIIx Music Parameter” with the 3

or 4 cursor buttons.

3. Press the ENTER button to enter the

selection.

PL x Music Parameter

ParameterCenter

Panorama Dimension Center Width

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

Parameter:

Select “Default” or “Custom” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. If you select “Custom”, you can adjust three parameters as listed below.

Panorama:

Select the Panorama mode “On” or “Off” with the

1 or 2 cursor buttons. Panorama wraps the sound of the front left and right speakers around you, for an exciting perspective.

Dimension:

Set the Dimension level between –3 and +3 level in 1 level intervals with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. Adjust the sound ﬁ eld either towards the front or towards the rear. This can be useful to help achieve a more suitable balance from all the speakers with certain recordings.

: Default

: Off : 0 : 3

Center Width:

Set the Center Width level between 0 and 7 in 1 level intervals with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. Center width allows you to gradually spread the center channel sound into the front left and right speakers. At its widest setting, all the sound from the center is mixed into the left and right speakers. This control may help achieve a more spacious sound or a better blend for the front image. If “None” was selected for the center speaker setting in the Speaker Size menu, this setting cannot be selected.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move cursor to “Return” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

3-3 CSII PARAMETER

1. Select “Surround Setup” from Main Menu

with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

2. Select “CS II Parameter” with the 3 or 4

cursor buttons.

3. Press the ENTER button to enter the

selection.

CS Parameter

TrubassCenter

SRS Dialog

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

Trubass:

Set the Trubass level between 0 and 6 in 1- level increments with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. Trubass produced by the speakers are an octave below the actual physical capabilities of the speakers adding exciting, deeper bass effects.

SRS Dialog:

Set the SRS dialog level between 0 and 6 in 1increments with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. This can be popped out of the surround audio effects, allowing the listener to easily discern what the actors say. If “None” was selected for the center speaker setting in the Speaker Size menu, this setting cannot be selected.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move cursor to “Return” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Note

• This parameter can only be set in the CSII mode.

: 0

3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER

The DTS NEO:6 mode enables a maximum 6.1 channel output with just 2 channel input. (It also supports 5.1 channel input.) This mode expands the sound image from the center channel.

1. Select “Surround Setup” from Main Menu

with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

2. Select “NEO:6 Parameter” with the 3 or 4

cursor buttons.

3. Press the ENTER button to enter the

selection.

NEO: 6 Parameter

Center Gain

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

4. Set the Center Gain level between 0.0 and

1.0 in 0.1 level increments with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move cursor to “Return” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Notes

• This parameter can only be set in the NEO:6Music mode.

• If “None” was selected for the center speaker setting in the Speaker Size menu, this setting is disabled.

: 0.3

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS SETUP

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

SETUP

4 VIDEO SETUP

Video settings are made as follows.

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

1. Select “Video Setup” from the Main Menu

BASIC

with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Video Setup

Video Convert

OSD Information HDMI Output

BASIC

ADVANCED

SETUP

HDMI Output Resolution Component Output Component I / P Convert

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : Select Exit : Exit

Video Setup

Video Convert

OSD Information HDMI Output Resolution Component I / P Convert

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : Select Exit : Exit

ADVANCED

2. Select the desired menu with the 3 or

4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER

button.

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERSSETUP

: Enable : Output1 : Auto : Main Zone : Disable

: Enable : Auto : Disable

SR6004

SR5004

• Video Convert

This unit is equipped to convert video signals for monitor output. This section explains how to set up conversion for each type of video input.

1. Select “Video Convert” with the 3 or

4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER

button.

Video Convert

BLU-RAY

DVD VCR DSS TV CD/CDR AUX M-XPort

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

: Analog & HDMI

: Analog & HDMI : Analog & HDMI : Analog & HDMI : Analog & HDMI : Analog & HDMI : Analog & HDMI : Analog & HDMI

2. Select “Function” with the 3 or 4 cursor

buttons and set the video conversion mode with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Analog&HDMI:

This mode both up-converts and down-converts analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video, Component Video). Furthermore, it up-converts from analog video signal to HDMI. (It cannot downconvert from HDMI digital video signals to analog video signals.)

Analog Only:

This mode both up-converts and down-converts analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video, Component Video). It does not up-convert to HDMI.

Off:

This mode turns off all conversion features.

Note

• For details on video convert feature, see page

43.

• OSD Information

Select the OSD information function to “Enable” or “Disable” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. If you select “Enable”, this unit will display the status of the feature (Volume up/down, input select, etc..) on the monitor. If you do not desire this information, select “Disable”.

Note

• OSD information is not output to Monitor Output of HDMI and Component Video. However, OSD information is output if the Video Convert function is used to output Video video signals to Monitor Out of HDMI and Component Video.

For details, refer to“Video Convert”on page 43.

• HDMI Output (SR6004 only)

This setting is for selecting which output terminal, HDMI 1 or HDMI 2, to output the signal to. Select the output destination with the 1 / 2 cursor buttons.

• HDMI Output Resolution

Selects the resolution of the video signal output from the HDMI terminal of this unit. Select from the following using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Auto ↔ Through ↔ 480p/576p ↔ 720p ↔ 1080i ↔ 1080p ↔ Auto ↔ ...

• Component Output (SR6004 only)

This setting is for selecting whether to output the images for the main zone or the images for the zone system to the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT terminal. Select the output destination between Main Zone and Zone A with the 1 / 2 cursor buttons.

• Component I/P Convert

Set whether or not to convert 480i/576i signals to 480p/576p signals when outputting the analog video input signal input from the VIDEO terminals or COMPONENT terminals. Select “Enable” or “Disable.” Disable: Do not convert Enable: Convert

Notes

• This setting is enabled only when Video Convert is set to other than Off.

When a monitor is connected to the HDMI MONITOR

• OUT terminal, and HDMI RESOLUTION is set to 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or AUTO, the I/P CONVERT for COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT does not function.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move cursor to “Return” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

ENGLISH

SETUP

5 PREFERENCE

1. Select “Preference” from Main Menu with

the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

2. Select the desired menu with the 3 or

4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER

button.

• Zone A Setup :

“5-1 ZONE SETUP” (see page 35)

• Zone B Setup :

“5-1 ZONE SETUP” (see page 35)

• DC Trigger Setup :

“5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP” (see page 36)

• Optical:

Select when using equipment with optical digital output.

Rec: Select when recording to a CD recorder or

Zone B: Select when using ZONE B. (See pages 21,

• Standby Mode:

When this is set to “Economy”, you can reduce the power consumption when the unit is in the Standby mode. When “Economy” is selected, “RS-232C” is disabled when the unit is in the Standby mode.

• Audio:

In the Audio mode, Dolby Digital and DTS output is set to either “Main” or “Sub”. Select “Audio” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, then select Main ↔

Sub ↔ Main+Sub with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

• HDMI Audio:

This setting determines whether to play back audio input to the HDMI jacks through the unit or output it through the unit to a TV or projector. Enable: The audio input to the HDMI jacks can

In such case, audio signals are not

Through: The audio input to the HDMI jacks is not

MD recorder. (See page 12)

55)

be played back by this unit.

output to the TV or projector.

output from the speaker terminals of the unit. Audio data is output directly to the TV or projector. This setting is used to listen to audio on a multi channel TV, etc.

• HDMI Lip Sync:

Video signals may take longer to process than audio signals depending on the connected video equipment. When the unit is connected to TV or Projector supporting Auto Lipsync Correction in HDMI 1.3a, audio and video can be automatically synchronized using this function. Use the 1 or 2 cursor buttons to switch between Enable and Disable. Enable: Auto Lipsync Correction is used to

synchronize audio and video.

Disable: Deactivates this function.

Notes

• This function is not available when the unit is connected to equipment that does not support HDMI 1.3a or Auto Lipsync Correction. For details, check the userʼs manual of the connected equipment.

• If this function is unavailable, you can use the regular Lipsync function to synchronize audio and video. (See page 42)

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “Return” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Preference

Zone A Setup

Zone B Setup DC Trigger Setup Optical Standby Mode Audio HDMI Audio HDMI Lip Sync

Return

: Up / Down : Enter : Select Exit : Exit

Zone A Setup

Audio Source

Sleep Timer Stereo / Mono.

Zone Pre Out Volume Mode Level

Zone Speaker Out Volume Mode Level

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

Zone B Setup

Audio Source

Sleep Timer Zone Digital Out

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

: BLU-RAY

: Off : Stereo

: Off : Variable : -90dB

* * *

: BLU-RAY (Dig.-)

: Off : Off

: Rec : Normal : Main : Enable : Disable

DC Trigger Setup

TriggerSystem Error!!

BLU-RAY DVD VCR DSS TV CD/CDR

7.1ch Input M-XPort Tune r USB Audio

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

DC Trigger Setup

TriggerSystem Error!!

BLU-RAY DVD VCR DSS TV CD/CDR

7.1ch Input M-XPort Tune r

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

: Disable

* * *

: Disable

* * *

SR6004

SR5004

5-1 ZONE SETUP

This unit has source selectors, sleep timers, zonespeaker output, and remote controller for the two other ZONEs in the ZONE system. These features can be set from this menu.

1. Select “Preference” from the Main Menu

with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

2. Select “Zone A Setup” or “Zone B Setup”

with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons.

3. Press the ENTER button to enter the

setting.

The following explanation shows how to operate ZONE A of the ZONE system.

Zone A Setup

Audio Source

Sleep Timer Stereo / Mono.

Zone Pre Out Volume Mode Level

Zone Speaker Out Volume Mode Level

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

The following explanation shows how to operate ZONE B of the ZONE system.

Zone B Setup

Audio Source

Sleep Timer Zone Digital Out

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

4. Select the desired item with the 3 or 4

cursor button.

Audio Source:

Select the audio source of the ZONE output with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

: BLU-RAY

: Off : Stereo

: Off : Variable : -90dB

* * *

: BLU-RAY(Dig.-)

: Off : Off

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS SETUP

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

SETUP

Sleep Timer:

The sleep mode is available when the ZONE is active, set the time with 1 or 2 cursor buttons. The sleep timer can be set to a maximum 120 minutes in 10 minute increments.

BASIC

Stereo / Mono: (Zone A only)

This mode switches audio output to the ZONE system between Monaural and Stereo, using the 1 and 2 cursor buttons.

Zone Pre Out: (Zone A only)

Switch the zone pre out “On” or “Off” with the 1

BASIC

or 2 cursor buttons.

Volume Mode: (Zone A only)

Select whether the zone pre out level is Variable or Fixed with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Level (Volume Level): (Zone A only)

ADVANCED

Adjust the zone pre out level with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. The volume can be set between

-90 dB and 0 dB in 1 dB increments.

Zone Speaker Out: (Zone A only)

Switch the zone speaker out “On” or “Off” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Volume Mode: (Zone A only)

SETUP

Select whether the zone speaker out level is Variable or Fixed with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Level (Volume Level): (Zone A only)

Adjust the zone speaker out level with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. The volume can be set between

-90 dB and 0 dB in 1 dB increments.

ADVANCED

Zone Digital Out: (Zone B only)

Switch the zone digital out “On” or “Off” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERSSETUP

Notes

• In ZONE A, it is impossible to use HDMI or digital input (optical and coaxial) sources.

• In ZONE B, it is possible to use digital input (optical and coaxial) sources.

• Zone Speaker Out setting can be changed when the Surround Back is set to “None” in the Speaker Size menu and “SPEAKER C” is in the OFF position on the rear panel. When this setting is unavailable, “***” is displayed.

• If “Volume” is set to “Fixed”, the ZONE output level cannot be adjusted from the ZONE A.

• Zone Speaker Out cannot be on the ZONE B.

• In ZONE B, input sources that have not been set cannot be used.

• There are no Stereo/Mono, Volume Mode, Level (Volume Level) or Zone Speaker Out settings for ZONE B.

• If Optical Output is set to Rec (See page 35), Zone B functions cannot be used.

5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP

This unit has a DC trigger control jack, which can be used to link with input functions for the main ZONE or ZONE A or ZONE B.

1. Select “Preference” from Main Menu with

the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

2. Select “DC Trigger Setup” with the 3 or 4

cursor buttons.

3. Press the ENTER button to enter the

selection.

DC Trigger Setup

TriggerSystem Error!!

BLU-RAY DVD VCR DSS TV CD/CDR

7.1ch Input M-XPort Tuner USB Audio

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

DC Trigger Setup

TriggerSystem Error!!

BLU-RAY DVD VCR DSS TV CD/CDR

7.1ch Input M-XPort Tuner

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

: Disable

* * *

: Disable

* * *

4. You can select “Main Zone”, “Zone A”,

“Zone B”, “Remote” or “Disable” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Note

• Remote is available for the external control. The RC007SR/RC008SR cannot operate the function.

SR6004

SR5004

5. Select desired input source with the 3 or 4

cursor buttons.

6. Set to “On” or “Off” with the 1 or 2 cursor

buttons.

7. After you complete this portion of the

setup, move the cursor to “Return” with the 3 or 4 cursor button and press the ENTER button.

Note

• When an input source that is on in the set ZONE is selected, voltage is output to the DC TRIG output terminal.

6 ACOUSTIC EQ

This display is for setting up the equalizer and changing the Equalizer mode.

1. Select “Acoustic EQ” from Main Menu with

the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

2. Select the desired menu with the 3 or

4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER

button.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

• EQ Mode:

There are 4 equalizer modes to choose from: Preset Graphic EQ that allows the user to manually adjust the equalizer, and AudysseyTM, Audyssey Front and Audyssey Flat that automatically adjust the equalizer from the measurement results of the Auto Setup feature (see page 27).

Audyssey Front:

Front L/R channels have no EQ correction applied while all other channels use the standard Audyssey mode for EQ correction.

Audyssey Flat:

This mode ﬂ attens the frequency characteristics of all speakers. It is suited for playback of multichannel music such as Dolby Digital and DTS.

Audyssey:

This mode adjusts the frequency characteristics of all speakers so as to create the best listening environment for the sound characteristics of the listening room.

User:

This mode adjusts the graphic equalizer that was set in Adjust User EQ to adjust the characteristics of each speaker (see page 38).

Off:

The graphic equalizer is not used.

To use the remote controller to change the EQ Mode, press the AMP button and press the EQ button.

Each time this button is pressed, the EQ Mode changes as follows.

Off Audyssey Front

User Audyssey

Notes

• “Audyssey Front”, “Audyssey Flat” and “Audyssey” can be selected after executing the Auto Setup feature.

• If a speaker that was determined “No” in Auto Setup is manually turned on, the “Audyssey”, “Audyssey Front” and “Audyssey Flat” modes cannot be selected.

• If, after auto setup was performed, changes were made to the settings, such as the speaker conﬁ guration and distance, channel levels and crossover frequencies, without increasing the number of speakers whose characteristics were measured, “*” will be displayed for the name of the mode.

Example: “Audyssey Flat*”

• The equalizer turns off when the Pure Direct mode, Source Direct mode, Dolby Headphone or Virtual mode is set.

• Acoustic EQ Modes are not used during playback of Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, or DTSHD signals.

Even in this case, settings made using Speaker

Auto Setup (speaker yes/no, distance, size, channel level, crossover) are enabled.

• Tone Control is disabled when an EQ Mode is in use.

Audyssey Fla

• Adjust User EQ :

“6-1 ADJUST USER EQ” (see page 38)

• Check Audyssey MultEQ® :

“6-2 CHECK AUDYSSEY MULTEQ” (see page 38)

• Audyssey Dynamic EQTM :

Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics. Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ to provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.

Select “On” or “Off” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

• Audyssey Dynamic EQTM Adjust :

Audyssey Dynamic EQ is referenced to the standard ﬁ lm mix level of 85 dB SPL for -20 dBFS. Due to the lack of standards outside the ﬁ lm industry, the ﬁ lm reference level may not be appropriate when listening to other material. Audyssey Dynamic EQ Adjust provides three offsets from the ﬁ lm level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be selected when the mix level of the content is not within the standard.

0 dB (Film Ref):

This is the default setting and should be used when listening to movies.

5 dB:

Select this setting for content that has a very wide dynamic range, such as classical music.

10 dB:

Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a wider dynamic range. This setting should also be selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at 10 dB below film referencce.

15 dB:

Select this setting for pop/rock music or other program material that is mixed at very high listening levels and has a compressed dynamic range.

Note

If Dynamic EQ is set to “Off”, these settings cannot be selected.

ENGLISH

SETUP

• Audyssey Dynamic VolumeTM :

Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression and dialog clarity remain the same. The amount of compression can be set to any of three levels.

Select “Light”, “Medium”, “Heavy” or “Off” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Note

When Audyssey Dynamic EQ is off, Audyssey Dynamic Volume cannot be used.

To change Audyssey Dynamic EQ and Audyssey Dynamic Volume using the remote controller, press the D.EQ/VOL button. Each time this button is pressed, the mode changes in the sequence shown below.

Off → Audyssey Dynamic EQ: On, Audyssey Dynamic Volume: Off → Audyssey Dynamic EQ: On, Audyssey Dynamic Volume: L → Audyssey Dynamic EQ: On, Audyssey Dynamic Volume: M → Audyssey Dynamic EQ: On, Audyssey Dynamic Volume: H → Off

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS SETUP

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

SETUP

BASIC

Adjust User EQ Reset

Channel

63Hz 125Hz

BASIC

ADVANCED

SETUP

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERSSETUP

250Hz 500Hz 1kHz 2kHz 4kHz 8kHz 16kHz Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

Check Audyssey MultEQ

EQ Mode

Channel 63Hz 125Hz 250Hz 500Hz 1kHz 2kHz 4kHz 8kHz 16kHz Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

: Channel

: Front Left

: 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB

: Audyssey

: Front Left : -15.0dB : -2.0dB : -5.0dB : +9.0dB : +3.0dB : -5.0dB : -7.0dB : -18.0dB : -20.0dB

Acoustic EQ.

EQ Mode

Adjust User EQ Check Audyssey MultEQ

Audyssey Dynamic EQ Audyssey Dynamic EQ Adj. Audyssey Dynamic Volume

Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

[dB]

+9dB

0dB

-9dB

-18dB 63

125250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k

[dB]

+9dB

0dB

-9dB

-18dB 63

125250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k

: Off

: Off : 0dB : Off

[Hz]

6-1 ADJUST USER EQ

These modes allow you to set a 9-band graphic equalizer for each of the 7 channels.

1. Select “Adjust User EQ” with the 3 or 4

cursor buttons.

2. Press the ENTER button to enter the

selection.

Adjust User EQ Reset

Channel

63Hz 125Hz 250Hz 500Hz 1kHz 2kHz 4kHz 8kHz 16kHz Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

Reset:

Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, select the channel(s) to be reset to either the currently displayed channel (“Channel”) or all channels (“All-Channel”), and press the ENTER button to enter the setting. “All-Channel” : Resets all channels. “Channel” : Resets only the currently displayed

Channel:

Select the channel (“Front Left”, “Front Height Left”, “Center”, “Front Height Right”, “Front Right”, “Surround Right”, “Surround Back Right”, “Surround Back Left” or “Surround Left”) to adjust with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, and

switch to the adjustment mode with the 4 cursor button.

Frequency:

Select the target frequency on the graph with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons. Adjust the level with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. (Note that this can be adjusted to any level between –20 and +9 dB in 0.5 dB increments.) Move to the next frequency with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons, and adjust the level.

: Channel

: Front Left

: 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB : 0.0dB

channel.

[dB]

+9dB

0dB

-9dB

-18dB 63

125250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k

[Hz]

6-2 CHECK AUDYSSEY MULTEQ

These menus are for conﬁ rming the results of Auto Setup function equalizer measurement (Audyssey Front, Audyssey Flat, Audyssey).

1. Select “Check Audyssey MultEQ” with the

3 or 4 cursor buttons.

2. Press the ENTER button to enter the

selection.

Check Audyssey MultEQ

EQ Mode

Channel 63Hz 125Hz 250Hz 500Hz 1kHz 2kHz 4kHz 8kHz 16kHz Return

: Up / Down : Change Enter : Exit : Exit

: Audyssey

: Center : -15.0dB : -2.0dB : -5.0dB : +9.0dB : +3.0dB : -5.0dB : -7.0dB : -18.0dB : -20.0dB

[dB]

+9dB

0dB

-9dB

-18dB 125250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k

[Hz]

EQ Mode:

Select EQ (mode) with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons followed by the desired equalizer (“Audyssey”, “Audyssey Front”, “Audyssey Flat”).

Channel:

Select the channel to check with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Notes

• The frequency will not be exactly the same as in the Preset Graphic EQ modes.

• Front Left and Front Right are not indicated on the Audyssey Front mode.

3. Once ﬁ nished checking, select “Return”

with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to return to the “Acoustic EQ” menu.

After you complete this portion of the setup move cursor to “Return” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

ADVANCED OPERATION

ENGLISH

AMP OPERATION

The unit shown in the illustrations is SR6004.

SELECTING THE SURROUND MODE

SURR. MODE

SURROUND MODE

For details on surround mode, refer to page 73.

(Using the unit)

Press the SURR. MODE button several times until the desired surround mode is selected.

(Using the remote controller)

After pressing the AMP button, press the SURR button several times until the desired surround mode is selected.

AUTO PURE

DIRECT

PURE DIRECT INDICATOR

AMP

SURR

AUTO

P.DIRECT

AUTO SURROUND

(Using the unit)

To select the Auto surround mode during playback, press the AUTO button on the front panel.

(Using the remote controller)

To select the Auto surround mode, press the AMP button and press the AUTO button.

• For surround modes, see “Surround Mode” on page 73.

PURE DIRECT

(Using the unit)

Press the PURE DIRECT button.

(Using the remote controller)

After pressing the AMP button, press the P.DIRECT button.

When this button is pressed once, “SOURCE DIRECT” appears on the FL display. If pressed again, “PURE DIRECT” appears. After 2 seconds, the FL display indication goes out. In the source/pure direct mode, the tone control circuitry and bass management are bypassed.

Each time this button is pressed, this mode changes as follows.

AUTO S-DIRECT PURE DIRECT

Notes

• The surround mode is automatically switched to

AUTO when the pure direct function is turned on.

• Additionally, speaker configurations are fixed

automatically as follows. Front SPKR = LARGE Center SPKR = LARGE Surround SPKR = LARGE Surround Back SPKR = LARGE Sub woofer = YES

DISPLAY MODE

You can select the display mode for the front display of the unit. To select this mode, press the DISPLAY on the remote controller or the front panel. When this button is pressed, the display mode is switched in the following sequence. Normal → Volume → Auto display OFF → Display OFF → Normal → ...

Normal mode:

The following three mode types are displayed.

• Displays the selected input function. If the function has been renamed using the Function Rename feature (see page 25), the renamed name appears on the display.

• Displays the input mode set via the Function Input Setup feature. (See page 25)

• Displays the status of the selected surround mode.

Volume mode:

The input function and input mode are displayed in the upper part, and the current volume level is displayed in the lower part.

Auto Display Off mode:

The display is off. But, if you make a change to the unit such as the input or surround mode, the display will show that change, then go back to off after about 3 seconds. When changing the volume, it is not displayed.

Display Off mode:

The display is off completely.

Note

• Only the “DISP” indicator will be illuminated on

the front display in display off condition.

DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION MESSAGE

Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of Dolby Digital. When playing back software which has been encoded in Dolby Digital, sometimes you may see a brief message on the FL display which will read "D-NORM X dB" (X being a numeric value). Dialogue Normalization serves to let you know if the source material has been recorded at a higher or lower level than usual. For example, if you see the following message: "D-NORM + 4 dB" on the FL display, to keep the overall output level constant just turn down the volume control by 4 dB. In other words, the source material that you are listening to has been recorded 4 dB louder than usual. If you do not see a message on the FL display, then no adjustment of the volume control is necessary.

VIDEO ON/OFF

When no video signal is connected to the unit or a DVD, etc., is connected directly to your TV, the unnecessary video circuit can be turned off by selecting the “VIDEO OFF” setting. To select video off, press the AMP button and press the V.OF F button.

The “V-OFF” indicator on the front display panel will light.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

ADVANCED OPERATION

ENGLISH

M-DAX (MARANTZ DYNAMIC AUDIO EXPANDER)

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

BASIC

This function makes up for lost audio content in

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

MP3 or AAC sources (from lossy compression)

ADVANCED

during playback. Choose one of the following levels for this effect as desired.

“HIGH”: Stronger effect “LOW”: Weaker effect “OFF”: Deactivated

(Using the remote controller)

SETUP

When switching to M-DAX mode, press the AMP button. Press the M-DAX button. Each time this button is pressed, M-DAX changes as follows.

ADVANCED

The “M-DAX” indicator on the front display lights when M-DAX mode is LOW or HIGH. (See page 5)

TROUBLESHOOTING

Notes

• M-DAX is compatible with PCM (48 kHz or lower) and two-channel analog sources.

• The M-DAX is not available when Dolby Virtual Speaker mode is being used.

OTHERS

OFF LOW HIGH

NIGHT MODE

Useful at night or when loud noise is undesirable, this mode compresses the dynamic range, making it easier to hear quieter audio content without increasing the overall volume. Note that the effect of night mode is determined by the Dolby Digital content. Night mode may have no effect with content that does not support this function.

1. To select this mode, press the AMP button

on the remote controller.

2. Each time the NIGHT button is pressed, the

mode changes according to the following options indicated on the front of the unit.

• AUTO Mode

NIGHT AUTO

AUTO mode is available when decording Dolby

TrueHD signals.

When night mode is activated, “NIGHT” is

illuminated on the front of the unit. (See page 5)

• NIGHT Mode ON

NIGHT ON

Setting the Night mode to “ON” compresses the

dynamic range in Dolby Digital only.

• NIGHT Mode OFF

NIGHT OFF

Turn off the Night mode.

↓

SPEAKER A/B

This unit has speaker system-A and speaker systemB for front L/R channels. You can select these systems by pressing SPKR A/B on the remote controller.

Press the SPKR A/B button. Each time this button is pressed, Speaker system A and B changes as follows.

A B A+B OFF

LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES

This jack may be used to listen to the unit’s output through a pair of headphones. Be certain that the headphones have a standard 1/4” stereo phono plug. Note that the speakers will automatically be turned off when the headphone jack is in use.

Notes

• When using headphones, the surround mode will change to STEREO and Dolby Headphone by MENU and Cursor button.

• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as soon as the headphone plug is removed from the jack.

DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE

This feature simulates the waveforms of the actual sounds heard from the speakers. When headphones are used, the MENU button automatically switches to the Dolby headphone mode. The OSD that appears when the MENU button is pressed is shown below.

HEAD PHONE

DOLBY HP MODE :DH SURROUND :PL

L LEVEL :+10.0dB R LEVEL : 0.0dB

DOLBY HP (Headphone) MODE can be selected with the left and right cursor buttons. BYPASS → DH (DOLBY Headphone) → BYPASS

BYPASS: Bypasses the Dolby headphone mode

DH: Dolby Headphone is a signal processing

It makes it possible to experience

When the PURE DIRECT mode is selected, Dolby surround processing is bypassed and “✽✽✽” is displayed as the mode indication. The surround mode can be selected when the modes in DH is selected. L/R LEVEL can be set in the ±12 dB range.

Notes

• The surround mode returns to the previous setting

• In headphone mode, Tone Control and ACOUSTIC

and delivers ordinary 2-channel stereo.

system that delivers a sound similar to room speakers.

the volume and space of a 5-channel surround system using ordinary stereo headphones.

as soon as the plug is removed from the jack.

EQ are not available.

II MV

ENGLISH

ADVANCED OPERATION

SELECTING ANALOG AUDIO INPUT OR DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT

If you have already assigned the digital inputs, you can temporarily select the audio input mode for each input source as following procedures. Press the AMP button and press the A/D button. When this button is pressed, the input mode is switched in the following sequence. Auto → HDMI → Digital → Analog → Auto

Auto mode:

The types of signals being input to the digital and analog input jacks for the selected input source are detected automatically. If no digital signal is being input, the analog input jacks are selected automatically.

HDMI mode:

HDMI mode can be selected only when an HDMI input has been assigned as an input source. When “HDMI Audio” under Preference of the Setup Menu is set to “Through”, the HDMI mode cannot be selected.

Digital mode:

The input signal is ﬁ xed to an assigned digital input terminal.

Analog mode:

The analog input jacks are selected.

This selection is temporary and will not be stored in memory. To store changes to the input mode, select “Input Setup” from the Main Menu. (See page 24)

Note

• This function cannot be used when performing USB, M-XPort or Tuner operations.

RECORDING AN ANALOG SOURCE

In normal operation, the audio or video source selected for listening through this unit is sent to the record outputs. This means that any program you are watching or listening to may be recorded simply by placing machines connected to the outputs for CD/CDR

OUT and VCR OUT in the record mode.

To record the input source signal you are currently watching or listening to

1. Select the input source to record by turning

the INPUT SELECTOR knob on the front panel or simply press the input selector buttons on the remote controller.

The input source is now selected and you

may watch or listen to it as desired.

2. The currently selected input source signal

is output to the CD/CDR OUT and VCR OUT outputs for recording.

3. Start recording to the recording component

as desired.

Notes

• When connecting only digital signal input, output cannot be made to the CD/CDR OUT or VCR OUT terminals. When using recording functions, be sure to also make connections for analog signal input.

• Video or audio signals input to HDMI input terminals cannot be recorded.

• The S-Video or video signals input from the AUX INPUT terminal are output to the VIDEO OUT (VCR) terminal.

However, video recording is not possible when

copy control signals are contained in the video signals.

7.1 CH INPUT

This unit is equipped for future expansion through the use of Multi channel Super Audio CD multichannel player or DVD-Audio player. When this is selected, the input signals connected to the L(front left), R (front right), CENTER, SL (surround left), SR (surround right) and SBL (surround back left) and SBR (surround back right) channels of the 7.1 CH. In jacks are output directly to the front (left and right), center, surround (left and right) and surround back speaker systems as well as the pre-out jacks without passing through the surround circuitry. In addition, the signal input to the SW (subwoofer) jack is output to the PRE OUT SW (subwoofer) jack. When 7.1 CH. INPUT is selected, the last video input used remains routed to the Monitor Outputs. This permits simultaneous viewing with video sources

Select a desired Video source to decide the routed video signal to the Monitor Outputs.

2. Press the 7.1 button on the remote controller

to switch the 7.1 channel input.

3. If it is necessary to adjust the output level of

each channel, press the CH.SEL button on the remote controller.

Adjust the speaker output levels so that

you can hear the same sound level from each speaker at the listening position. For the front left, front right, center, surround left, surround right and surround back speakers, the output levels can be adjusted between –12 to +12 dB.

The subwoofer can be adjusted between

–18 and +12 dB.

These adjustments result will be stored to

7.1 CH. INPUT memory.

4. Adjust the main volume with the MAIN

VOLUME knob or the VOL buttons on the remote controller.

7.1CH LEVEL ADJUST

FRONT.L LEVEL: 0.0 dB CENTER LEVEL: 0.0 dB FRONT.R LEVEL: 0.0 dB SURR.R LEVEL: 0.0 dB S.B R LEVEL: 0.0 dB S.B L LEVEL: 0.0 dB SURR.L LEVEL: 0.0 dB SUB W LEVEL: 0.0 dB

To cancel the 7.1 CH. INPUT setting, press the 7.1 button on the remote controller.

Notes

• When the 7.1 CH. Input is in use, you may not select a surround mode, as the external decoder determines processing.

• In addition, there is no signal at the record outputs when the 7.1 CH. Input is in use.

• Furthermore, the following functions are not available during 7.1 CH Input use.

Test Tone, NIGHT MODE, Source Direct, Pure

Direct, HT-EQ, Tone Control, Acoustic EQ.

ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL

If the selected analog audio input signal is greater than the capable level of internal processing, the “PEAK” indicator will light up on the front display. If this happens, you should press the ATT button on the remote controller. “ATT ” indicator will be illuminated when this function is activated. The signal-input level is reduced by about half. Attenuation will not work with the output signal of CD/CDR and VCR-OUT. This function is memorized for each individual input source.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

ADVANCED OPERATION

ENGLISH

LIP.SYNC

Depending on the image device (TV, monitor, projector, etc.) connected to the unit a time lag

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

can occur between image signal processing and audio signal processing. Though minor, this time

BASIC

lag can interfere with movie and music enjoyment. The LIP.SYNC feature delays the audio signal with respect to the image signal output from the unit to correct the time lag between the sound and image. It can be operated with the “LIP SYNC” and 1 and 2 cursor buttons of the remote controller. Set the remote controller to the AMP mode before

BASIC

operating the LIP.SYNC feature. The initial setting is OFF (0 ms).The time lag can be adjusted in 10 ms steps up to 200 ms. Watch the picture on the image device (i.e., TV, monitor, projector, etc.) as you adjust the time lag.

ADVANCED

SETUP

USING THE SLEEP TIMER

To program this unit for automatic standby, press the SLEEP button on the remote controller. Each press of the button will increase the time before shut down in the following sequence.

OFF 10 20 30 5040

100 90 80 70 60110120

The sleep time will be shown for a few seconds in the display on the front panel, and it will count down until the time has elapsed. When the programmed sleep time has elapsed, the unit will automatically turn off. Note that the SLEEP indicator on the display will illuminate when the Sleep function is programmed. To cancel the Sleep function, press the SLEEP button until the display shows “SLEEP OFF” and the SLEEP indicator will disappear.

DUAL BACKUP MEMORY

The unit stores settings information in nonvolatile memory even when the main power supply is turned off. Using the Dual Backup Memory function, you can write settings information to another memory area to back up saved settings for recovery anytime as needed.

BACKUP

Set up the unit in the state for which you want to store the settings. Hold the MEMORY and ENTER buttons on the front panel simultaneously for at least 3 seconds.

“MEMORY SAVING” is displayed and the unit’s settings are saved. The stored settings information is retained until Dual Backup Memory is used again and the information is overwritten.

MEMORY SAVING

RECOVERY OF MEMORY

Recover backed up settings as follows. Hold the MEMORY and MENU buttons on the front panel simultaneously for at least 3 seconds.

“MEMORY LOAD” is displayed and the unit’s stored settings are reapplied. The unit temporarily enters standby mode. If there is no backup data, “NO BACKUP” is displayed and no data is recovered.

MEMORY LOAD

NO BACKUP

ADVANCED

Notes

• The LIP.SYNC feature turns OFF (0 ms) in the SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode. When the SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode is deactivated, the set value of the LIP.SYNC feature is automatically restored.

• Even if you do not correct the time lag manually this way, audio and video are automatically synchronized when the unit is connected to TV or Projector supporting Auto Lipsync Correction in HDMI 1.3a. For instructions on Auto Lipsync Correction, see page 35.

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

FRONT KEY (BUTTON) LOCK OF THE UNIT

To lock all front panel buttons (except the POWER ON/ OFF button) and the INPUT SELECTER and VOLUME knobs, hold the PURE DIRECT and EXIT buttons on the front panel simultaneously for at least 3 seconds. At this time, “F-KEY LOCK!” is displayed. To unlock the controls, press the same buttons again simultaneously for at least 3 seconds. At this time, “F-KEY UNLOCK” is displayed, and the buttons are released.

SURR. MODE

PURE

DIRECT

EXIT CLEAR

Note

The following settings values cannot be backed up, each Volume value is set to Minimum.

• Main ZONE Volume

• ZONE A Volume

• ZONE Speaker A Volume

ENGLISH

ADVANCED OPERATION

VIDEO CONVERT

ANALOG VIDEO CONVERSION

This unit is equipped to convert video signals for monitor output. Because of this, indifferent of the connection (VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT VIDEO) between the playback device and this unit, listening and viewing are possible with a single higher grade cable between the MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit and the monitor.

UP-CONVERSION FROM ANALOG VIDEO SIGNALS TO HDMI

The up-conversion feature of this unit can output the input analog video signals (for component video signals of 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 1080i and 720p resolution, and S-Video and Video (composite) of 480i/576i resolution) to the HDMI MONITOR terminal.

Notes

• HDMI video input is only output to the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit. If connecting a playback device such as a DVD player to the HDMI input jack, connect the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit to a TV monitor.

• This mode is unavailable for the REC out terminal.

• This mode is unavailable for still picture, fast forward and reverse play on video component.

If, while attempting to use the video convert feature,

• the unit cannot synchronize with the display device, “NO SIGNAL” appears on the monitor or noise is generated, this feature cannot be used. All of these signs are caused by equipment incompatibility; there is nothing wrong with the unit.

If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the

“VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”. Next, connect the video input signal to the display component via the MONITOR OUT terminal under VIDEO and the S-video input signal to the display component via the MONITOR OUT terminal under S-VIDEO.

• The video convert feature constantly monitors input video signals and determines whether to convert the input signals or not. However, some input video signals cannot be detected correctly. If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the “VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”.

CONNECTION EXAMPLE

• When a monitor is connected to the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

or component

or HDMI

Notes

• If the resolution of the component video signal input from the playback device is other than 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 1080i or 720p, images are not output from the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit.

• If the resolution of the Video signal input from the playback device is other than 480i/576i, images are not output from the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit.

HDMI

• When a monitor is connected to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals of the unit

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

or component

HDMI

Notes

• The HDMI video signal input from the playback device is not output from the VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals of the unit.

• If the resolution of the component video signal input from the playback device is other than 480i/576i, it is not output from the VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals of the unit.

VIDEO

• When a monitor is connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

or component

HDMI

Note

• The HDMI video signal input from the playback device is not output from the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit.

Note of OSD menu system

• The setup menu can be displayed through all video out terminals (“HDMI”, “COMPONENT” and “VIDEO”).

component

I/P CONVERT

The video circuit of the unit is equipped with an I/P conversion feature. When this feature is on, 480i/576i analog video signals (VIDEO, S-VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO) input from a playback device can be converted to 480p/576p and progressively output to the COMPONENT VIDEO or HDMI MONITOR OUT terminals of the unit. (For setting instructions, see page 34)

Note

When a monitor is connected to the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal, and HDMI RESOLUTION is set to 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or AUTO, the I/P CONVERT for COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT does not function.

HDMI OUT (SR6004 ONLY)

HDMI OUTPUT 1 or 2 can be selected and used with this unit. Each time the HDMI button on the remote controller is pressed, OUTPUT 1 is switched to OUTPUT 2 or vice versa. HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 cannot be output simultaneously.

HDMI-O = OUT1

HDMI RESOLUTION

This function is used to output the analog video signal to HDMI as follows.

• 480i/576i signals can be converted to 480p/576p, 1080i, 720p or 1080p signals, while 480p/576p signals can be converted to 1080i, 720p or 1080p signals.

• 720p signals can be converted to 1080i or 1080p.

• 1080i signals can be converted to 1080p.

• The output resolution can be set for HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2. (SR6004 only)

Notes

• Do not set to 1080i, 720p or 1080p when

connected to a monitor that does not support 1080i, 720p or 1080p signals. The SETUP MENU will not be displayed. If the SETUP MENU is not displayed, change settings while viewing the unit display panel.

• The resolution of analog component output

cannot be changed.

• HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 cannot be output

simultaneously. (SR6004 only)

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

ADVANCED OPERATION

TUNER OPERATION (PRESET MEMORY)

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

The unit shown in the illustrations is SR6004.

BASIC

ADVANCED

SETUP

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

PRESET MEMORY

With this unit you can preset up to 60 FM/AM stations in any order. For each station, you can memorize the frequency and reception mode if desired.

AUTO PRESET MEMORY

This function automatically scans the FM and AM band and enters all stations with proper signal strength into the memory.

1. To select FM , press the BAND button on

the front panel.

2. While pressing the MEMORY button, press

the 2 cursor button.

“AUTO PRESET” will appear on the display,

and scanning starts from the lowest frequency.

3. Each time the tuner ﬁ nds a station, scanning

will pause and the station will be played for ﬁ ve seconds.

During this time, the following operations

are possible.

The band can be changed by the BAND

button.

4. If no button is pressed during this period,

the current station is memorized in location Preset 01.

If you wish to skip the current station, press

the 3 cursor button during this period, this station is skipped and auto presetting continues.

5. Operation stops automatically when all 60

preset memory positions are ﬁ lled or when auto scanning attains the highest end of all bands. If you desire to stop the auto preset memory at anytime, press the CLEAR button.

Note

• When entering a single digit number (2 for example), either input “02” or just input “2” and wait for a few seconds.

RECALLING A PRESET STATION

PRESET SCAN

MANUAL PRESET MEMORY

2.4.

1. 3.

(Using the unit)

1. Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer

to the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING” section).

2. Press the MEMORY button on the front

panel. “– –“ (preset number) starts blinking on the display.

3. Select the preset number by pressing the

1 or 2 cursor buttons, while this is still blinking (approx. 5 seconds)

4. Press the MEMORY button again to enter.

The display stops blinking.

The station is now stored in the speciﬁ ed

preset memory location.

(Using the remote controller)

1. Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer

to the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING” section).

2. Press the MEMO button on the remote

controller. “– –“ (preset number) starts blinking on the display.

3. Enter the desired preset number by pressing

the numeric buttons.

2. 4.

(Using the unit)

1. Select the desired preset station by pressing

the 1 or 2 cursor buttons on the front panel.

(Using the remote controller)

1. Press the TUNE button twice within two

seconds on the remote controller.

2. Press the 1 or 2 button to tune in the

deseired preset station.

Or enter the preset station number with the

numeric buttons.

(Using the remote controller)

1. Press the TUNE button twice within two

seconds on the remote controller.

2. Press the P.SCAN button on the remote

controller.

“PRESET SCAN” appears on the front

display and then the preset station with the lowest preset number is recalled ﬁ rst.

3. Preset stations are recalled in sequence

(No.1 → No.2 → etc.) for 10 seconds each.

No stored preset number will be skipped.

4. You can fast forward the preset stations,

press the 2 continuously.

5. When the desired preset station is received,

cancel the preset scan operation by pressing the CLR button or P.SCAN button on the remote controller.

PRESET CHANNEL LIST DISPLAY

A complete list of the broadcast channels stored in this unit can be displayed.

1. Press the TUNE button on the remote

controller twice within two seconds to switch to the TUNER function.

ENGLISH

ADVANCED OPERATION

2. Press INFO button on the remote

controller.

3. The list of preset channels will be displayed

on the screen of the TV monitor connected to this unit.

PRESET LIST

NO. 1 FM 87.10 MHz NO. 2 FM 93.10 MHz NO. 3 FM 94.70 MHz NO.10 FM105.70 MHz

RETURN NEXT EXIT

4. Up to 10 channels can be displayed at a

time. If there are more than 10 channels, press INFO on the remote controller once more to display the next page.

In a few moments the list display is cleared

automatically.

CLEARING STORED PRESET STATIONS

You can remove preset stations from the memory using the following procedure.

3.2.

1. Recall the preset number to be cleared

with the method described in “Recalling” a preset station.

2. Press the MEMORY button on the front

panel or press the MEMO button on the remote controller.

3. The stored preset number blinks in the

display for 5 seconds. While blinking, press the CLEAR button on the front panel or the CLR button on the remote controller.

4. “xx CLEAR” appears on the display to

indicate that the speciﬁ ed preset number has been cleared.

Note

• To clear all stored preset stations, press and hold the T.MODE and the ENTER buttons for two seconds.

SORTING PRESET STATIONS

If you have stations memorized, and there is a gap in the sequential order: I.e. the stations are stored as follows

1) 87.1 MHz

2) 93.1 MHz

3) 94.7 MHz

10) 105.9 MHz (notice there is no stations programmed for pre sets for 4-9), you can have pre set 10 become pre set 4: To sort the numbers, press and hold the MEMORY and the 4 cursor buttons. “PRESET SORT” will appear on the display and sorting will be done.

NAME INPUT OF THE PRESET STATION.

This function allows the name of each preset channel to be entered using alphanumeric characters. Before name inputting, you need to store preset stations with the preset memory operation.

2. 5. 6.5.4.

1. Recall the preset number to be inputted

name with the method described in “Recalling” a preset station.

2. Press the MEMORY button on the front

panel or press the MEMO button on the remote controller for more than 3 seconds.

3. The left most column of the station name

indicator ﬂ ashes, indicating the character entry ready status.

4. When you press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons

on the front panel or the remote controller, alphabetic and numeric characters will be displayed in the following order:

A ↔ B ↔ C ... Z ↔ 1 ↔ 2 ↔ 3 ..... 0 ↔ – ↔ +

↔ / ↔ (Blank) ↔ A

↔ DOWN

UP ↔

5. After selecting the first character to be

entered, press the MEMORY or ENTER button, or press the MEMO button on the remote controller.

The entry in this column is ﬁ xed and the

next column starts to ﬂ ash. Fill the next column the same way.

To move back and forth between the

characters, press the 1 / 2 cursor buttons.

Note

• Unused columns should be filled by entering blanks.

6. To save the name, press the MEMORY or

ENTER button on the front panel, or press

the MEMO button on the remote controller for more than 2 seconds.

Instead of using the 3 and 4 cursor

buttons to select characters, characters can be input from the numeric keys of the remote controller. See the below table for a correspondence between characters and numeric keys.

Numeric

keypad

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

A → B → C → 1 → A D → E → F → 2 → D G → H → I → 3 → G J → K → L → 4 → J M → N → O → 5 → M P → Q → R → 6 → P S → T → U → 7 → S V → W → X → 8 → V Y → Z → space → 9 → Y – → + → / → 0

Display

→ –

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

ADVANCED OPERATION

ENGLISH

TUNER OPERATION (RDS)

Now in use in many countries, RDS (Radio Data

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

System) is a description of the station’s programming hidden space in the FM signal. Your new unit is equipped with RDS to assist in

BASIC

the selection of FM stations using station and network names, rather than broadcast frequencies. Additional RDS functions include the ability to search for programme types.

BASIC

ADVANCED

RADIO TEXT

Some RDS stations broadcast RADIO TEXT, which is additional information on the station and programme being broadcast. RADIO TEXT information appears as ‘running’ text in the display. RADIO TEXT is transmitted character by the radio station. As a result of that it may take some time until the entire text has been completely received.

RDS DISPLAY

When a unit is tuned to an FM station that is transmitting RDS data, the Front Panel Information

SETUP

Display will automatically show the station name or RDS TEXT in place of the typical display of the station’s broadcast frequency. To change the display, press the TUNE button and press the T.DISP button.

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

PS (

Program Service Name

RT (

RADIO TEXT

) Frequency

)

PROGRAMME TYPE (PTY) DISPLAY

The RDS system categorizes programmes according to their genre into different programme type (PTY) groups. To display the programme type information of the current station, press the TUNE button and press the PTY button.

PTY AUTO SEARCH

Your unit is equipped to automatically search for stations transmitting any of 29 different programme types. To search for a PTY, follow these procedures:

1. Press the PTY button in the TUNER MODE

on the remote controller. The current station’s PTY will be displayed, or the currently selected PTY group will be displayed in blinking if no station or RDS data is present.

2. To change to a new PTY type, press the

TUNING 3 or 4 button on the front panel or press the 1 or 2 button or numeric buttons on the remote controller until the desired PTY is shown in the display.

3. Once the desired PTY group or type has

been selected, press the PTY button while the display blink (approx. 5 seconds). The PTY Auto search will start, and the tuner will pause at each station broadcasting RDS PTY information corresponding to the selected choice.

4. To advance to the next RDS station with the

desired PTY, press the PTY button again within 5 seconds.

NUMBER DISPLAY PROGRAMME TYPE

1 POP M Pop Music 2 ROCK M Rock Music 3 EASY M M. O. R. Music 4 LIGHT M Light classical 5 CLASSICS Serious classical 6 NEWS News 7 AFFAIRS Current Affairs 8 INFO Information

9 SPORT Sport 10 EDUCATE Education 11 DRAMA Drama 12 CULTURE Culture 13 SCIENCE Science 14 VARIED Varied 15 OTHER M Other Music 16 WEATHER Weather 17 FINANCE Finance 18 CHILDREN Children’s programmes 19 SOCIAL Social Affairs 20 RELIGION Religion 21 PHONE IN Phone In 22 TRAVEL Travel 23 LEISURE Hobbies 24 JAZZ Jazz Music 25 COUNTRY Country Music 26 NATION M National Music 27 OLDIES Oldies Music 28 FOLK M Folk Music 29 DOCUMENT Documentary

OTHERS

ENGLISH

ADVANCED OPERATION

USB OPERATION (SR6004 ONLY)

The unit comes with a USB connection terminal, allowing any USB Mass Storage Class standardcompliant USB media to be used.

For details on the ﬁ le systems and music ﬁ les of the USB media supported by the unit, refer to page 54.

PREPARATIONS FOR USB OPERATION

(Using the unit)

1. To select USB, turn the INPUT SELECTOR

knob on the front panel.

(Using the remote controller)

1. Press the USB button two times in a row.

2. The top menu screen is displayed.

WHAT APPEARS ON THE FL DISPLAY

→

USB:

→

NO DEVICE

q Function display:

Displays the names of the functions.

w Status display:

Displays the statuses of the USB function. Error

messages are also displayed. (See page 53)

WHAT APPEARS ON THE MONITOR SCREEN (TOP MENU)

USB Audio

e r

q Function display:

Displays the names of the functions.

w Status display:

Displays the statuses of the USB function. (See page 53)

e Volume display:

Displays the volume level.

r Guidance display:

Displays descriptions of the function keys.

Notes

• The characters that can be displayed on the unit's front panel display and monitor screens are ASCII characters and some Latin characters. Characters that cannot be displayed are converted into asterisks (“*”), and displayed. With some music information or ﬁ lenames, however, the characters may not be displayed correctly.

• If no operation is performed for 10 minutes or longer, the screen saver display appears on the monitor screen.

The screen saver can be enabled or disabled by

• holding down ENTER (either on the unit or remote controller) for 3 seconds on the top menu screen.

No device-30dB

Enter : Exit :

UNIT

REMOTE CONTROLLER

3/4 (Remote controller, main unit)

(Remote controller, main unit)

ENTER

(Remote controller, main unit)

EXIT

(Remote controller, main unit)

7 (STOP)

(Remote controller)

TOP

(Remote controller)

PAGE+/–

(Remote controller)

2 (PLAY)

(Remote controller)

; (PAUSE)

(Remote controller)

∞ / § (SKIP)

(Remote controller)

5 / 6 (SEARCH)

(Remote controller)

INFO

(Remote controller)

REPEAT

(Remote controller)

RANDOM

(Remote controller)

SETUP/MODE

(Remote controller)

• When performing operations using the remote controller, press the USB button once to switch the remote controller to USB mode.

USB operation

Moves the cursor

Moves to the folder one level lower

Moves to the folder one level higher

Moves to the selected folder when the cursor is positioned on the folder Plays the selected ﬁ le when the cursor is positioned on the ﬁ le

Stops

Stops Moves to the highest level

folder, highest hierarchical level (+) Moves to the next page (–)

Moves to the previous page

Plays

Pauses/releases (§) Plays the next ﬁ le

(∞) Plays the previous ﬁ le (Moves to the head of the ﬁ le if the ﬁ le has been played less than 1 second from the head of the ﬁ le) (6) Initiates fast forward (5) Initiates fast reverse (The speed can be changed each time the button is pressed.) Switches between the list screen and status screen

Repeats

Conducts random-play

–

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

ADVANCED OPERATION

CONNECTING USB MEDIA

1. Connect the USB media containing the

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

ADVANCED

SETUP

OPERATION

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

music ﬁ les to the USB connector on the unit’s front panel.

2. The folders and music ﬁ les contained on

the USB media are displayed as a list.

WHAT APPEARS ON THE FL DISPLAY

→

USB:Folder1

→

Album name

q Function display/main folder name:

Displays the names of the functions and main

folders.

w Cursor information:

Displays the currently selected ﬁ le and folder.

WHAT APPEARS ON THE MONITOR SCREEN (FILE LIST)

USB Audio

../Folder1

Album name1

Album name2 Title name1.mp3 Title name2.wav Title name3.m4a Title name4.wma Title name5.mp3 Title name6.wav Title name7.m4a Title name8.wma

y i

-30dB

: Browse

[ 01/18 ]

Stop

Enter : Select Exit :

q Function display:

Displays the names of the functions.

w Name of main folder:

Displays the name of the main folder currently

listed and displayed.

e List number/total number:

Displays the list number at the cursor position

and the total number of ﬁ les and subfolders.

r Subfolders, ﬁ le list:

Displays the subfolders and ﬁ les in the order in

which they were stored on the storage media. When ﬁ les and folders are mixed, the folders are displayed ﬁ rst.

t Selection cursor:

Selects ﬁ les and folders.

y Play status:

Displays the play status of the ﬁ le being played.

u Page indicator:

Appears when the list pages can be scrolled up

or down.

i Guidance display:

Displays descriptions of the function buttons.

ICON DISPLAYS

: Folders (main folders, subfolders) : Files being played

Note

When playing an audio ﬁ le less than 5 seconds long, the unit may not play it properly or it may not display its music information properly.

e t

PLAYING FILES ON THE USB MEDIA

1. Select the tracks to be played, and press the

ENTER or 2 (PLAY) button.

The status display screen appears, and the

tracks are played in ﬁ le list order.

2. To play another ﬁ le while a ﬁ le is playing,

press the 1 button, and display the ﬁ le list. Use the 3/4 buttons to move the icon to the desired track, and press the ENTER or 2 (PLAY) button.

3. To stop playback, press the 9 button.

4. To return to the status screen while the list

screen is displayed, press the INFO button.

WHAT APPEARS ON THE FL DISPLAY

→

USB:Artist nam

→

Title name

q Function display/name of artist:

Displays the function name and artist name. If

there is no artist name, “Unknown Artist” is displayed instead.

w Playback status/title:

Displays the playback status and title. If the title

is unknown, the ﬁ lename minus its extension is displayed.

WHAT APPEARS ON THE MONITOR SCREEN (STATUSES)

USB Audio

../Folder1

08/18

Track

Title name

Title:

r t y

u i !0 !1 !2

q Function display:

Displays the names of the functions.

w Status display:

Displays the statuses of the USB function. Error

messages are also displayed.

e Current ﬁ le number/total number of ﬁ les:

Displays the number of the ﬁ le currently playing

and the total number of ﬁ les contained in the main folder.

r Title display:

Displays the title of the file being played.

The filename is displayed if there is no tag information.

t Artist name display:

Displays the name of the play file artist.

“Unknown Artist” appears if there is no artist name.

y Album name display:

Displays the name of the play file album.

“Unknown Album” appears if there is no album name.

u Elapsed time:

Displays the elapsed play time of the ﬁ le.

i Duration time:

Displays the total play time of the ﬁ le.

o Repeat/random statuses:

Displays the repeat and random statuses. They

are not displayed when the settings are OFF.

!0 Play status:

Displays the play status of the currently selected

ﬁ le.

Artist: Album:

Elapsed Duration

: Browse

Artist name Album name

03:26 09:19

Now Playing-30dB

Enter : Exit : Stop

!1 Volume display:

Displays the volume level.

!2 Guidance display:

Displays descriptions of the function buttons.

ICON DISPLAYS

The following icons are displayed on the screen.

: Folder (main folder) : File : Artist : Album : Elapsed time : Duration time

: All ﬁ les repeat : Folder ﬁ le repeat : 1 ﬁ le repeat : Random-play

LISTENING TO FILES REPEATEDLY (REPEAT PLAY)

The tracks on the USB media can be played in 1 track (1 ﬁ le) repeat mode, folder ﬁ le repeat mode or all tracks (all ﬁ les) repeat mode.

PLAYING TRACKS AT RANDOM (RANDOM PLAY)

The ﬁ les contained on the USB media can be played at random.

Each time the remote controller’s RANDOM button is pressed, random play is changed from ON to OFF or vice versa. The range of random play differs depending on the repeat play setting.

Repeat off : All audio ﬁ les on the USB device are

played at random.

Repeat on : The files in the play range of the

repeat settings are played repeatedly at random.

Random play is started when the 2 button is pressed while ON is selected.

ENGLISH

ADVANCED OPERATION

PLAYING SPECIFIC PARTS (SEARCH)

Search is started when the remote controller’s 5 or 6 button is pressed during play. The search speed can then be changed by pressing the remote controller’s 5 or 6 button.

• Search + / Search – Each time the 6 (Search +) or 5 (Search -) button is pressed, the speed is changed by one setting in the following sequence.

SEARCH 1 + → SEARCH 2 + → SEARCH 3 + → PLAY → SEARCH 1 + → SEARCH 1 – → SEARCH 2 – → SEARCH 3 – → PLAY → SEARCH 1 + →

Search mode

SEARCH 1 +/-

SEARCH 2 +/-

SEARCH 3 +/-

What appears on the

monitor display

(+) 1 Search + (+) 1 6 Rapid advance at 2x normal speed (–) 1 Search – (–) 1 5 Rapid reverse at 2x normal speed

(+) 2 Search + (+) 2 6 Rapid advance at 4x normal speed (–) 2 Search – (–) 2 5 Rapid reverse at 4x normal speed

(+) 3 Search + (+) 3 6 (–) 3 Search – (–) 3 5 Rapid reverse at 10x normal speed

Operations that appear

on the FL display

Movement

Rapid advance at 10x normal speed

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

Each time the remote controller’s REPEAT button is pressed, the modes are selected in the following order.

OFF Folder

Note

When playing ﬁ les in folder ﬁ le repeat mode, the files in the selected main folder will be played repeatedly. (Play does not include files in the subfolders.)

ALL 1

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

ADVANCED OPERATION

ENGLISH

iPod OPERATION (SR6004 ONLY)

When an iPod (ﬁ fth or later generation), iPod nano,

CONNECTIONS

iPod classic, iPod touch or iPhone is connected to the unit, the sound from the iPod is transmitted digitally (using linear pulse code modulation (LPCM)

BASIC

encoding), and it can be reproduced with a higher sound quality.

For details of the types of music ﬁ les and iPods/ iPhones supported, refer to page 54.

OPERATION

BASIC

PREPARATIONS FOR iPod OPERATION

(Using the unit)

CONNECTIONS

ADVANCED

SETUP

1. To select USB, turn the INPUT SELECTOR

knob on the front panel.

(Using the remote controller)

OPERATION

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

1. Press the USB button two times in a row.

2. The top menu screen is displayed.

OTHERS

WHAT APPEARS ON THE FL DISPLAY

→

USB:

→

NO DEVICE

q Function display:

Displays the names of the functions.

w Status display:

Displays the statuses of the USB function. Error

messages are also displayed. (See page 53)

WHAT APPEARS ON THE MONITOR SCREEN (TOP MENU)

USB Audio

e r

q Function display:

Displays the names of the functions.

w Status display:

Displays the statuses of the USB function. (See page 53)

e Volume display:

Displays the volume level.

r Guidance display:

Displays descriptions of the function keys.

Notes

• If no operation is performed for 10 minutes or longer, the screen saver display appears on the monitor screen.

The screen saver can be enabled or disabled by

• holding down ENTER (either on the unit or remote controller) for 3 seconds on the top menu screen.

No device-30dB

Enter : Exit :

UNIT

REMOTE CONTROLLER

3/4 (Remote controller, main unit)

(Remote controller, main unit)

ENTER

(Remote controller, main unit)

EXIT

(Remote controller, main unit)

7 (STOP)

(Remote controller)

TOP

(Remote controller)

PAGE+/–

(Remote controller)

2 (PLAY)

(Remote controller)

; (PAUSE)

(Remote controller)

∞ / § (SKIP)

(Remote controller)

5 / 6 (SEARCH)

(Remote controller)

INFO

(Remote controller)

REPEAT

(Remote controller)

RANDOM

(Remote controller)

SETUP/MODE

(Remote controller)

• When performing operations using the remote controller, press the USB button once to switch the remote controller to USB mode.

iPod operation

Moves the cursor

Moves to the item one level lower

Moves to the item one level higher

Moves to within the selected item when the cursor is positioned on the item Plays the selected track when the cursor is positioned on the track

Stops

Moves to the highest leve (+) Moves to the next page

Moves to the previous page

(–) Plays

Pauses (§) Plays the next track

(∞) Plays the previous track (6) Inititates fast forward (5) Initiates fast reverse (When the corresponding button is held down) In remote mode: Switches between the list screen and status screen In direct mode: Switches between the the image from AUX and status screen

Repeats

Shufﬂ es items Moves to the item one level

higher Switches between direct mode and remote mode

CONNECTING THE iPod

The unit has two modes, direct mode and remote mode, for operating the iPod. When the unit's power is turned on, the unit is set to direct mode.

1. Connect the iPod to the USB terminal on

the unit's front panel.

When the iPod is detected, the function display changes from the diplay for USB to the diplay for iPod.

WHAT APPEARS ON THE FL DISPLAY

→

iPod:Artist na

→

; Title nam

q Function display/name of artist:

Displays the names of the function and artist.

w Playback status/title:

Displays the playback status and title.

PLAYING TRACKS ON THE iPod (DIRECT MODE)

In this mode, the operations are performed using the controls of the iPod.

VIEWING THE STATUS SCREEN

In direct mode, the images from AUX are usually output to the monitor, but it is possible to view the information (status screen) of the track now playing instead.

1. Each time the INFO button is pressed, the

display switches between the status screen and images from the AUX.

ENGLISH

ADVANCED OPERATION

y Elapsed time:

Displays the elapsed play time of the ﬁ le.

u Duration time:

Displays the total play time of the ﬁ le.

i Repeat/shufﬂ e statuses:

Displays the repeat and shufﬂ e statuses. They

are not displayed when the settings are OFF.

o Play status:

Displays the play status of the currently selected

ﬁ le.

!0 Volume display:

Displays the volume level.

!1 Guidance display:

Displays descriptions of the function buttons.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

2. The track information of the track being

played or being paused is displayed on the unit’s front panel.

The images of the video component connected to the VIDEO terminal among AUX INPUT terminals on the front panel can be output to a monitor. (Direct mode only)

Notes

• For details on supported iPod models, refer to page 54.

• Direct mode does not support ﬁ fth generation iPods or ﬁ rst generation iPod nanos. When one of these iPods has been connected, the “Press mode key” message appears. Press the MODE button to change to remote mode, and use the iPod in this mode. (For details on switching the mode, refer to page 50.)

•

When a TV set is connected using the HDMI terminal, some moments may be needed until the display is switched after the INFO button is pressed.

• Depending on the video player components connect to the AUX INPUT terminals, the start of the content may be skipped when play is commenced.

The iPod's basic operations can also be performed using the unit's remote controller.

1. To play a track, press the 2 (PLAY) button.

2. To temporarily stop (pause) play, press the

; button.



To move to the next track during play, press the § button; to move to the start of the track while that tracking is playing or to move to the previous track, press the ∞ button.

3. To stop play, press the 7 button.

Other than the buttons mentioned above, the 3/4, ENTER and MENU buttons can be used.

WHAT APPEARS ON THE MONITOR SCREEN (STATUSES)

iPod

08/26

Track

Title name

Title:

e r t

y u o !0 !1

q Function display:

Displays the names of the functions.

Current track number/total number of tracks:

Displays the number of track now playing and

the total number of tracks in the current item.

e Title display:

Displays the title of the track being played.

r Artist name display:

Displays the name of the play track artist.

“Unknown Artist” appears if there is no artist name.

t Album name display:

Displays the name of the play track album.

“Unknown Album” appears if there is no album name.

Artist: Album:

Elapsed Duration

Artist name Album name

00:00 03:26

Pause-30dB

Enter : Exit :

iPod

ICON DISPLAYS

: Song : Artist : Album : Elapsed time : Duration time

: All tracks repeat : One track repeat

: Tracks shufﬂ e : Albums shufﬂ e

Note

The Repeat/Shuffle icon may not be displayed correctly.

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

ADVANCED OPERATION

ENGLISH

PLAYING TRACKS ON THE iPod (REMOTE MODE)

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

To select a track while viewing the monitor screen, change to remote mode. (Refer to page 50.) It will not be possible to perform operations using

BASIC

the iPod’s controls as long as the unit is in remote mode.

BASIC

ADVANCED

1. Select the track to be played, and press the

ENTER or 2 (PLAY) button.

The status screen is displayed, and the track

starts playing in the title or list sequence.

2. To temporarily stop (pause) play, press the

; button.

SETUP



3. To play another track at any point during

play, press the MENU or 1 button to display the items.

Use the 3/4 buttons to move to the desired

track, and press the ENTER or 2 button.

4. To stop play, press the 7 button.

ADVANCED

5. To return to the status screen while the list

screen is displayed, press the INFO button.

WHAT APPEARS ON THE FL DISPLAY

TROUBLESHOOTING

→

iPod:TOP MENU

→

9 Playlists

q Function display/name of the item one level

higher:

Displays the function name and name of the

OTHERS

item one level higher.

 Cursor information:

Displays the currently selected track and item

name.

WHAT APPEARS ON THE MONITOR SCREEN (ITEM LIST)

iPod

Top Menu

Playlist

Artists Albums Genres Songs Composers Audiobooks Podcasts

y i

-30dB

: Browse

Stop

Enter : Select Exit :

q Function display:

Displays the names of the functions.

w Name of the item one level higher:

Displays the name of the item one level higher.

e List number/total number of items or tracks:

 Displays the list number at the cursor position/

total number of items or tracks.

r Item or track list:

 Displays the list of items or tracks.

t Selection cursor:

 Selects the items or tracks.

y Play status:

Displays the play status of the ﬁ le being played.

u Page indicator:

Appears when the list pages can be scrolled up

or down.

i Guidance display:

Displays descriptions of the function buttons.

[ 1/8 ]

iPod

ICON DISPLAYS

: Item icon

LISTENING TO TRACKS REPEATEDLY (REPEAT PLAY)

Change the repeat setting of the iPod.

e t

Each time the remote controller’s REPEAT button is pressed, the modes are selected in the following order.

OFF ALL

SHUFFLING THE TRACKS AND LISTENING TO THEM (SHUFFLE PLAY)

Change the shufﬂ e setting of the iPod.

Each time the RANDOM button on the remote controller is pressed, the setting is switched in the sequence shown below.

OFF Albums

Songs

PLAYING SPECIFIC PARTS (SEARCH)

When the 5 or 6 button of the remote controller is held down during play, a search is started.

CHANGING THE OPERATION MODE OF THE iPod

1. Press the SETUP/MODE button.

The iPod operation mode changes.

(Direct mode ⇔ Remote mode)

Direct mode is restored when the iPod is disconnected or the main unit's power is turned off while remote mode is established.

MONITOR SCREEN (REMOTE MODE)

iPod

Top Menu

Playlist

Artists Albums Genres Songs Composers Audiobooks Podcasts

-30dB

: Browse

Stop

Enter : Select Exit :

MONITOR SCREEN (DIRECT MODE)

iPod Top menu

Playlist

Artist Albums Genres Songs Composers Audiobooks Podcasts

Stop-30dB

: Browse

In direct mode, the images from AUX are usually output to the monitor.

Enter : Select

(AUX input - video)

[ 1/8 ]

[ 01/18 ]

Exit :

iPod

ENGLISH

ADVANCED OPERATION

OTHERS (USB / iPod)

STATUS DISPLAYS

When any of the displays listed in the table below have appeared on the FL display, it means that the unit is one of the statuses listed below.

What appears on the FL display

NO DEVICE

CHECK DEVICE

CHECK FS

!OVER CURRENT!

NO AUDIO FILE

CHECK FILE

PRESS TOP KEY

PRESS MODE KEY

CHECK iPod

What appears on

the monitor display

No device

Check device

Check FS

!Over current!

No audio ﬁ le

Check ﬁ le

Press top key The reading of the ﬁ le failed.

Press mode key

Check iPod

The USB or iPod has not been connected properly.

An unrecognizable device has been connected.

USB media with an unsupported ﬁ le system has been connected.

The overcurrent protection function of the unit’s USB connector has been triggered.

USB media with no playback files recorded on it has been connected.

The unit has attempted to play a non-playable ﬁ le.

An iPod that does not operate correctly in direct mode was connected.

The iPod cannot be detected properly.

Status

SUPPORTED MEDIA (USB)

• Do not connect a personal computer to the unit's USB connector. Music cannot be imported to the unit's USB connector from a personal computer.

• It may not be possible to use a media device that has been plugged into a USB card reader.

• Depending on the USB media being used, it may take some time to read the data.

• Depending on the USB media being used, it may not be possible to read the data correctly or the power may not be supplied correctly.

• Users should bear in mind that we will not be liable in any way for any losses of or changes to data or for any media malfunctions which occur while the USB media device is being used. We recommend that you make a backup of any data stored on USB media before using the media in this unit.

Speciﬁ cations Compliance with USB 2.0 full speed

Connections supported

Sub class SCSI

Devices in compliance with the USB Mass Storage Class standard

− USB ﬂ ash memory devices (sizes of 256MB and up supported)

− HDDs supporting USB connections

− When a portable audio player is used as a USB memory devices

FILE SYSTEMS SUPPORTED (USB)

• When USB media is partitioned, the unit can read only the ﬁ rst partition. Furthermore, depending on the partition conﬁ guration, it may not be possible to read the partition correctly.

Formats FAT16 / FAT32

Hierarchy Partition Basic area of less than 255 GBytes in head partition.

Maximum number of folders 700 Maximum number of ﬁ les 65535 Maximum number of folder characters Maximum number of ﬁ le characters

Hierarchical levels of folders whose ﬁ les can be played hierarchically: Max. 8 levels excluding the root

64 Byte (VFAT long names supported)

640Byte (VFAT long names supported) Extensions (.xxx) included

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

ADVANCED OPERATION

PLAYABLE FILE FORMATS (USB)

• Copyright-protected audio ﬁ les cannot be played using the unit.

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

• Playlists are not supported.

• Even if the selected music ﬁ les were recorded in a format supported by the unit, it may not be possible

BASIC

to play them or noise may be heard.

Standards supported

BASIC

MP3

ADVANCED

WMA wma WMA Tag

AAC m4a

WAV wav None

SETUP

Extension

mp3 ID3V1/ID3V2 MPEG-1 Layer-III

mp3 ID3V1/ID3V2

Character

information

supported

AAC header (iTunes content information)

Standard Range supported

MPEG-2 LSF Layer-III

Microsoft Windows Media Audio 9.2 supported

MPEG-2/4 AAC LC

RIFF Waveform Audio Format

Sampling frequency 32kHz – 48kHz

Bit rate

Sampling frequency 16kHz – 24kHz

Bit rate

Sampling frequency 32kHz – 48kHz

Bit rate

Sampling frequency 8kHz – 48kHz

Bit rate

Sampling frequency 32kHz – 48kHz Bit number 16bit

32kbps – 320kbps (CBR/VBR)

8kbps – 160kbps (CBR/VBR)

8kbps – 160kbps (CBR) Peak 384kbps (VBR)

8kbps – 320kbps (CBR/VBR)

ABOUT iPod PLAY BACK

• Supported iPod Models

Made for

• iPod touch (2nd generation)

• iPod touch (1st generation)

• iPod classic

• iPod with video

• iPod nano (4th generation)

• iPod nano (3rd generation)

• iPod nano (2nd generation)

• iPod nano (1st generation)

Works with

• iPhone

• iPhone 3G

• Some operations may differ depending on the iPod model.

• If the iPod’s software is old, it may not operate properly. Please be sure to use up-to-date iPod software.

• The iPod is a device licensed for the private duplication and playback of uncopyrighted material or material for which duplication and playback are legally permitted. Violation of copyright is legally prohibited.

• The iPod equalizer cannot be operated from the unit. Before connecting an iPod to this unit, it is recommended that the iPod equalizer be set to “OFF”.

• It is recommended to set “Clicker” setting of the iPod to “Off” or “Speaker”

• Please note that we offer no compensation if problems occur in the iPod data when using this unit with an iPod.

• Any ﬁ les that can be played on an iPod(AAC, MP3, Apple Lossless, WAV and AIFF) can be played on this unit.

OPERATION

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

ADVANCED OPERATION

ZONE SYSTEM

The ZONE System mode allows the same source or different sources to be heard in two ZONEs other than where this unit is installed.

To use the ZONE system, connect the audio from the ZONE OUT A and B AUDIO output terminals to the ZONE A and B amps.

If a surround back channel speaker or speaker C (see page 21) are not used in the ZONE where this unit is installed, the ZONE speaker system can be used with the amp for the surround back channel.

This unit supports ZONE system functions such as source selectors, ZONE speaker output, sleep timers and remote control.

The unit shown in the illustrations is SR6004.

ZONE PLAYBACK USING THE ZONE OUT TERMINALS

3. 4.

1. Press the ZONE A or B button on the

remote controller.

2. When the ZONE setting mode is engaged,

one of the following screens appears on the display for 10 seconds.

* Display when ZONE A is selected

ZA DVD -18dB

* Display when ZONE B is selected

ZB DVD(D2)

3. Select the input source using the INPUT

SELECTOR knob on the unit or the function

button on the remote controller.

4. Set the ZONE volume to be used by the

ZONE system to taste either by turning the VOLUME knob on the unit or by pressing the VOLUME +/– buttons on the remote controller.

5. To cancel this function, press the ZONE A

or B button on the remote controller (after pressing the AMP button on the remote controller).

“MULTI” indicator on the front panel will

be turned off.

Notes

• In ZONE A, it is impossible to use HDMI or digital input (optically or coaxially connected) sources.

In ZONE B, it is possible to use only digital input

(optically and coaxially connected) sources.

• The sleep timer, monaural output and other features can also be set using the MAIN MENU.

(See page 35)

• The volume for ZONE B cannot be set on the unit. Control the volume by adjusting it on the amp connected to ZONE B OUT.

• When component video output is not being used in the main ZONE, it can be used for ZONE A instead. Refer to page 34. (SR6004 only)

ZONE PLAYBACK USING THE ZONE SPEAKER A TERMINALS

This unit allows you to connect another set of speakers amp and place them in a different ZONE or separated area for Iistening to music.

3. 4.

1. Press the ZONE SPEAKER (Z.SPKR) button

on the remote controller.

2. When the ZONE SPEAKER setting mode

is engaged, one of the following screens appears on the display for 10 seconds.

* Display when ZONE SPEAKER A is selected

ZSA DVD -18dB

3. Select the input source using the INPUT

SELECTOR knob on the unit or the function

button on the remote controller.

4. Set the ZONE volume to be used by the

ZONE system to your own preference, either by turning the VOLUME knob on the unit or by pressing the VOLUME +/– buttons on the remote controller.

5. To cancel this function, press the Z.SPKR

button on the remote controller (after pressing the AMP button on the remote controller).

“MULTI” indicator on the front panel will

be turned off.

Notes

• Digital input (optically and coaxially connected) sources cannot be used for ZONE speaker A.

• The sleep timer, monaural output and other features can also be set using the MAIN MENU. (See page 35.)

Notes for ZONE Speaker

• The ZONE Speaker mode can be set for only one of the ZONE A.

• The ZONE SPEAKER output can be used when Surround Back Speaker = “None, Zone SPKR” in the SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See SPEAKER SETUP, page 30)

• “Check! Height or Surr Back Speakers” is displayed when the ZONE SPEAKER button is pressed when the Surround Back Speaker is not set to “None, Zone SPKR” in the SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See SPEAKER SETUP, page 30)

• The ZONE speaker mode cannot be used at the same time as the speaker C. When connecting for ZONE use, set the SPEAKER C selector switch on the rear panel to OFF.

• When the unit is put in ZONE SPEAKER mode and ZSP A has been set as the Surround Back or Front Height Speaker (page 30), the ZONE SPEAKER function can be turned on automatically simply by pressing the SOURCE button.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

ADVANCED OPERATION

REMOTE CONTROLLER OPERATION

CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS

CONNECTIONS

1. Press the desired SOURCE button.

BASIC

2. Press the desired operation buttons to play the selected component.

• For details, refer to the component’s user guide.

• It may not be possible to operate some models.

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ BD (BD MODE) CONTROLLING A MARANTZ DVD (DVD MODE)

OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

SR6004 SR5004

BASIC

ADVANCED

SETUP

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the BD player on and off POWER OFF Turns the BD player off(*) POWER ON Turns the BD player on(*) HDMI (SR6004 only) Z.SPKR AMP function enabled ZONE A/B AMP function enabled A/D AMP function enabled ATT AMP function enabled

7.1 AMP function enabled SPKR A/B AMP function enabled SOURCE AMP function enabled AMP AMP function enabled INPUT 3 / 4 AMP function enabled SETUP DISPLAY AMP function enabled MUTE AMP function enabled SURR AMP function enabled VOLUME+/- AMP function enabled TOP INFO Displays the disc information(*)

CURSOR ENTER Enters the setting

MENU Calls up the menu of the disc EXIT Exits from SETUP MENU(*) MACRO (M) (RC007SR only) HT-EQ (RC008SR only) PAUSE PAUSE PLAY PLAY STOP STOP PREVIOUS/NEXT Skips forward or previous chapter/track REWIND/FORWARD 0-9,+10 Inputs the numeric(*) T.TONE(CLR) Clears the inputting(*) REPEAT Selects REPEAT PLAY(*) RANDOM Selects RANDOM PLAY(*) TV POWER Turns the TV on and off TV INPUT Selects the TV video input TREBLE-/+ AMP function enabled BASS-/+ AMP function enabled

(*)Both RC007SR and RC008SR do not have the PRESET code

library for these keys.

AMP function enabled

Calls up the setup menu of the BD player(*)

Calls up the top menu of the disc(*)

Moves the cursor for setting in “On Screen Display” mode

Selects the MACRO mode

AMP function enabled

Searches forward or backward

SR6004 SR5004

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the DVD player on and off POWER OFF Turns the DVD player off(*) POWER ON Turns the DVD player on(*) HDMI (SR6004 only) Z.SPKR AMP function enabled ZONE A/B AMP function enabled A/D AMP function enabled ATT AMP function enabled

CURSOR ENTER Enters the setting

MENU Calls up the menu of DVD EXIT Exits from SETUP MENU(*) MACRO (M) (RC007SR only) HT-EQ (RC008SR only) PAUSE PAUSE PLAY PLAY STOP STOP PREVIOUS/NEXT Skips forward or previous chapter/track REWIND/FORWARD 0-9,+10 Inputs the numeric(*) T.TONE(CLR) Clears the inputting(*) REPEAT Selects REPEAT PLAY(*) RANDOM Selects RANDOM PLAY(*) TV POWER Turns the TV on and off TV INPUT Selects the TV video input TREBLE-/+ AMP function enabled BASS-/+ AMP function enabled

(*)Both RC007SR and RC008SR do not have the PRESET code

library for these keys.

AMP function enabled

Calls up the setup menu of the DVD player(*)

Calls up the top menu of DVD (*)

Moves the cursor for setting in “On Screen Display” mode

Selects the MACRO mode

AMP function enabled

Searchs forward or backward

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ DSS (DSS MODE)

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD (CD MODE)

ENGLISH

ADVANCED OPERATION

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

SR6004 SR5004

SOURCE ON/OFF

HDMI (SR6004 only) Z.SPKR AMP function enabled ZONE A/B AMP function enabled A/D AMP function enabled ATT AMP function enabled

INFO CORSOR Moves the cursor for setting

ENTER Enters the setting MENU Calls up the menu EXIT Exits from MENU(*) MACRO (M) (RC007SR only) HT-EQ (RC008SR only) 0-9 Inputs the numeric T.TONE(CLR) Clears the inputting(*) TV POWER Turns the TV on and off TV INPUT Selects the TV video input

BASS/CH

(*)Both RC007SR and RC008SR do not have the PRESET code

library for these keys.

Turns the satellite broadcasting tuner on and off

AMP function enabled

Display the information of the satellite broadcasting tuner(*)

Selects the MACRO mode

AMP function enabled

Selects the satellite broadcasting tuner channel up or down

SR6004 SR5004

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the CD player on and off POWER OFF Turns the CD player off(*) POWER ON Turns the CD player on(*) HDMI (SR6004 only) Z.SPKR AMP function enabled ZONE A/B AMP function enabled A/D AMP function enabled ATT AMP function enabled SPKR A/B AMP function enabled

7.1 AMP function enabled SOURCE AMP function enabled AMP AMP function enabled INPUT 3 / 4 AMP function enabled DISPLAY AMP function enabled MUTE AMP function enabled SURR AMP function enabled VOLUME+/- AMP function enabled INFO AMP function enabled ENTER Enters the setting(*) MENU Calls up the menu(*) MACRO (M) (RC007SR only) HT-EQ (RC008SR only) PAUSE PAUSE PLAY PLAY STOP STOP Previous/Next Skips forward or previous chapter/track Rewind/Forward Searchs forward or backward 0-9,+10 Inputs the numeric(*) T.TONE(CLR) Clears the inputting(*) REPEAT Selects REPEAT PLAY(*) RANDOM Selects RANDOM PLAY(*) TV POWER Turns the TV on and off TV INPUT Selects the TV video input TREBLE-/+ AMP function enabled BASS-/+ AMP function enabled

(*)Both RC007SR and RC008SR do not have the PRESET code

library for these keys.

AMP function enabled

Selects the MACRO mode

AMP function enabled

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

CONNECTIONS

ADVANCED OPERATION

BASIC

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ TV (TV MODE)

OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

SR6004 SR5004

BASIC

ADVANCED

SETUP

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the TV on and off POWER OFF Turns the TV off(*) POWER ON Turns the TV on(*) HDMI (SR6004 only) Z.SPKR AMP function enabled ZONE A/B AMP function enabled A/D AMP function enabled ATT AMP function enabled SPKR A/B AMP function enabled

7.1 AMP function enabled SOURCE AMP function enabled AMP AMP function enabled INPUT 3 / 4 AMP function enabled DISPLAY AMP function enabled MUTE AMP function enabled SURR AMP function enabled VOLUME+/- AMP function enabled INFO Display the information of TV(*) CURSOR Moves the cursor for setting (*) ENTER Enters the setting(*) MENU Calls up the menu(*) EXIT Exits from MENU(*) MACRO (M) (RC007SR only) HT-EQ (RC008SR only) 0-9,+10 Inputs the numeric(*) T.TONE(CLR) Clears the inputting(*) TV POWER Turns the TV on and off TV INPUT Selects the TV video input BASS/CH Selects TV channel up or down

(*)Both RC007SR and RC008SR do not have the PRESET code

library for these keys.

AMP function enabled

Selects the MACRO mode

AMP function enabled

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ RX101 (M-XP MODE)

SR6004 SR5004

HDMI (SR6004 only) Z.SPKR AMP function enabled ZONE A/B AMP function enabled A/D AMP function enabled ATT AMP function enabled

7.1 AMP function enabled SPKR A/B AMP function enabled SOURCE AMP function enabled AMP AMP function enabled INPUT 3 / 4 AMP function enabled DISPLAY AMP function enabled MUTE AMP function enabled SURR AMP function enabled VOLUME+/- AMP function enabled INFO AMP function enabled MACRO (M) (RC007SR only) HT-EQ (RC008SR only) PAUSE PAUSE PLAY PLAY STOP STOP Previous/Next Skips forward or previous chapter/track Rewind/Forward Searchs forward or backward TV POWER Turns the TV on and off TV INPUT Selects the TV video input TREBLE-/+ AMP function enabled BASS-/+ AMP function enabled

(*)Both RC007SR and RC008SR do not have the PRESET code

library for these keys.

AMP function enabled

Selects the MACRO mode

AMP function enabled

ENGLISH

ADVANCED OPERATION

SR6004 REMOTE CONTROLLER BASIC OPERATION

NORMAL MODE

(When operating Marantz AV equipment products)

This remote controller is preset with a total of 12 types of remote codes, including Marantz BD, DVD, VCR (VCR deck), DSS (Satellite broadcasting tuner), TV (Television), CD, CDR, AUX, TUNER, USB, M-XP and AMP mode. Learning is not necessary for Marantz products. You can use these products without setting any codes.

1. Press the SOURCE button.

For this example, press DVD. Pressing the SOURCE button once changes

the remote control to the settings for the source that was pressed.

To change the ampliﬁ er on other source,

press the SOURCE button twice (doubleclick). The code is sent, and then the ampliﬁ er source changes to DVD.

SETTING THE BACK LIGHT

Pressing the Light button located on the side of the remote controller lights the remote controller’s backlight. Pressing the button again while the backlight is lit lights the backlight for another 2 seconds. To turn off back light, press and hold down the SET and OFF button until indicator blinks twice. To turn on it again, press and hold down the SET and ON button until indicator blinks twice. Initial is back light ON.

PRESET MODE

(When operating non-Marantz AV equipment products)

This remote controller is preset with remote control codes from AV equipment by other manufacturers. The preset codes are TV, CD, DVD and DSS. Settings can be made in one of two ways. When the preset codes are set, the following codes are contained in the source button of the remote controller.

See the attached manufacturer number list for the preset manufacturers, devices, preset numbers, and other settings.

Remote

controller

source name

TV TV Television DVD DVD DVD player CD CD CD player

DSS SATELLITE

BD BD

Importants

• Some codes may be not match your equipment. In this case, you can use LEARN mode to store

these codes.

• The preset codes do not cover full functions. If you need extra function, use LEARN mode to

store extra function.

• When the batteries are getting weak, the preset procedure is not successful.

Corresponding

preset code

Device name

Satellite broadcasting tuner equipment

Blu-ray disc player

PROGRAMMING WITH THE 4-DIGIT CODE

1. Press and hold down the SOURCE button

for the appliance which should be controlled and press SET button until the indicator blinks twice. Then back light ﬂ ushes.

2. Press the 4-digit code by numeric buttons

for appliance (code table at the end of this book)

Display 4-digit code on the LCD.

When the procedure is successful, “OK” is

displayed on the LCD.

Note

If “NG” is displayed on the LCD, then repeat steps 1 through 2 and try entering the same code again.

SCANNING THE CODE TABLE

1. Switch on the appliance which should be

controlled.

2. Press and hold down the SOURCE button

for appliance which should be controlled and press SET button until the indicator blinking twice. Then back light ﬂ ushes.

3. Aim the remote control at the appliance

and slowly alternate between pressing INPUT 3 button and the SOURCE ON/OFF button for the appliance.

Display the setup number on the LCD.

4. Stop when the appliance turns off.

5. Press ENTER button once to lock in the

code.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

ADVANCED OPERATION

ENGLISH

CHECKING THE CODE

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

BASIC

1. Press and hold down the SOURCE button

CONNECTIONS

ADVANCED

SETUP

OPERATION

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

for appliance which should be controlled and press SET button until the indicator blinking twice then back light ﬂ ushes.

2. Press the INFO button.

The indicator will blink twice.

3. To setup code for all digits is displayed on

the LCD in 3 seconds.

RESETTING THE CODE

1. Press and hold down the SOURCE button

for appliance which should be controlled and press SET button until the indicator blinking twice.

Then back light ﬂ ushes.

2. Press the below codes to reset.

TV : 1000 DVD : 2000 CD : 3000 DSS : 4000 BD : 5000

Note

After this procedure, the selected SOURCE button is set initial code.

LEARN MODE

This remote controller is capable of learning and storing codes used by other remote controls that you already own. For codes which are not learned, the remote controller will transmit either the Marantz preset codes from the initial settings, or remote codes from another manufacturer’s AV equipment which is set by the customer. The receiver sensor for the remote controller signals is located at the top of the remote controller.

Notes

• This remote controller is capable to learn around 160 codes.

• When the batteries are getting weak , the learning procedure is not successful.

LEARNING PROCEDURE

1. Place the remote controller so that its

infrared signal transmitter is facing the infrared signal receiver on the Marantz remote controller at a distance of about 5 cm (2 inches).

5 cm

2. Press and hold down the SET and SETUP

buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

3. Select the SOURCE button to select the

SOURCE, the SOURCE name is displayed on the LCD.

4. Select the button to be learned.

• LEARN indicator stop to blink.

Notes

• The learning function is unavailable for all SOURCE buttons and HDMI button in any mode.

• The learning function is unavailable for all buttons in TUNER mode, USB mode, M-XP mode and AMP mode.

5. Press and hold the button of the original

remote controller to learn until “OK” is displayed on the LCD.

• When “NG” is displayed on the LCD, repeat this step.

• When the memory of the remote controller is full, “FULL” is displayed on the LCD. If you want to learn the code, you should erase other learned button.

OTHERS

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to learn other buttons

in same SOURCE.

7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 to learn other

SOURCE.

ENGLISH

ADVANCED OPERATION

8. When you have ﬁ nished programming the

remote controller, press the SET button, then LEARN indicator stops blinking and exits from the LEARN mode.

Notes

• When “NG” is displayed on the LCD once again, the transmitting code is unavailable for remote controller, or the transmitting signal is intercepted by noise.

• If no buttons are pressed for approximately 1 minute while in the LEARN mode, the remote controller automatically exits from the LEARN mode.

ERASING PROGRAMMED CODES (RETURNING TO INITIAL SETTINGS)

Codes can be erased in three ways: by buttons, sources, and by all memory contents.

ERASING THE CODE BY BUTTONS

1. Press and hold down the SET and SETUP

buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

2. Select the SOURCE button to select the

button to be erased.

The source name is displayed on the LCD.

3. Press and hold down the HDMI button

and press the learned button twice to be erased.

• “ERASE” is displayed on the LCD and the mode returns to LEARN mode.

ERASING THE CODE BY SOURCE

1. Press and hold down the SET and SETUP

buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

2. Press and hold down the HDMI button and

press the learned SOURCE button twice to be erased.

• “ERASE” is displayed on the LCD.

3. Press ENTER button to continue erasing.

• The indicator blinks twice and the mode returns to LEARN mode.

• To cancel the erasing operation, do not press ENTER button and simply touch any other button.

ERASING THE ALL SOURCES

1. Press and hold down the SET and SETUP

buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

2. Press and hold down the HDMI button and

press POWER ON and POWER OFF button.

• LEARN indicator lights.

3. Press ENTER button to continue erasing.

• “ERASE” is displayed on the LCD and the mode returns to LEARN mode.

• To cancel the erasing operation, do not press ENTER button and simply touch any other button.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4. To return the NORMAL mode, press the

SET button.

4. To return the NORMAL mode, press the

SET button.

4. To return the NORMAL mode, press the

SET button.

Note

Erasing codes will return to the factory preset code, or there will leave empty if the button has no factory preset code.

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

ADVANCED OPERATION

SR6004 REMOTE CONTROLLER MACRO MODE

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

ADVANCED

SETUP

OPERATION

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

PROGRAMMING MACROS

Macros make it possible to use a single function button to perform more complex series of operations that would normally require pressing several buttons. A single MACRO can be programmed to perform up to 10 steps in sequence. A typical example of such a series might be as follows:

• Turn this unit’s power on

• Switch this unit's input source to DVD

• Turn the TV’s power on

• Set the DVD player to play.

• No signals may be transmitted during macro programming.

• The various steps that make up a macro are set initially to be sent one after another in 1 second intervals, however these intervals may be shortened to as little as 0.5 seconds or lengthened to as much as 5 seconds using the setup mode.

• In the macro mode, the number of steps the macro is displayed with Macro list number.

• Macros may be programmed 6 list.

MACRO button + numeric button (Example :

Macro list No.1 → MACRO button + “1”)

PROGRAM METHOD OF MACRO

↓

1. Press and hold the SET and MACRO button

until the LEARN, MACRO indicators and MACRO are displayed blinking on the LCD.

2. Press the numeric button for which you

wish to program a series of operations.

Press the 1 button.

• “M1-01” is displayed on the LCD.

• If selected macro number has already been set the program, the LCD will blink.

3. Press the function buttons and command

button for the operations you wish to program as a macro in the sequence.

For example, press DVD button and 2

button.

Press DVD Button (DVD Function)

↓

Press 2 Button (Fixed 1st step)

• The number of steps in the macro is displayed on LCD and this number increases by 1 with each button pressed.

• Each macro number can be programmed to perform up to 10 steps in sequence.

Note

When programing the ampliﬁ erʼs input source in the macro program, ﬁ rst press the AMP button, and press the source button.

(In the case of DVD input: AMP → DVD)

4. When you are finished programming

macros, press and hold the ENTER button until the display returns to normal mode (Turn off the LEARN and MACRO indicators).

• In the macro mode, it is possible to program the memory to perform macros containing up to 10 steps.

• Macros cannot be programmed for the

MEMO, cursor, ENTER, VOLUME+/– and CLR buttons.

Note

If, while programming, no buttons are pressed for approximately 1 minute, the remote controller will automatically return to normal mode, and no macro will be programmed in the memory.

CONFIRMING MACROS

Macros may be confirmed using following procedure.

1. Press and hold the MACRO and MENU

buttons until the LEARN, MACRO indicators and MACRO are displayed blinking on the LCD.

2. Press the numeric button to be conﬁ rmed. Let’s use the example of macro number 1,

by pressing “1” button.

• LEARN, MACRO indicators and M1-01 are displayed blinking.

3. Press the VOLUME button.

• M1-01 is displayed and LEARN is disappeared.

• The programmed operation is transmitting.

ENGLISH

ADVANCED OPERATION

4. Repeat step 3. until the last number of the

macro is displayed.

• The display will return to step

• The each programmed operation is transmitting when the number of the macro is displayed.

5. To return the normal mode, press and hold

down the ENTER button until MACRO is disappeared on the LCD.

1..

EDITING MACROS

Macros may be edited using following procedure.

1. Press and hold the MACRO and MENU

button until the LEARN, MACRO indicators and MACRO are displayed blinking on the LCD.

2. Press the numeric button to be changed. Let’s use the example of programmed

MACRO 1, by pressing “1” button.

• LEARN, MACRO indicators and M1-01 is displayed blinking.

3. Press the cursor button (3 or 4) to select

the number of macro to be edited.

• The programmed operation is displayed after the number of macro is displayed.

• The number of macro can be changed with the cursor button.

• To rewrite an existing macro step, simply press function button and programed for the new step. The old step will be erased and rewritten with the new step.

• To insert a new step in between existing steps in a macro, after step MEMO button, then press the button for the new step. The numbers of the other steps will be adjusted accordingly to accommodate the new step. Since only 10 steps may be stored in any macro, the tenth step will be erased if an step is inserted when the total number of steps is already 10.

• To erase a step in a macro, after step

3. call up the number of the step to be

erased and press the CL button.

4. Press the ENTER button to return step 1.

5. To return the normal mode, press and hold

down the ENTER button until MACRO is disappeared on the LCD.

3. press the

USING MACROS

The following procedure will show how to use macro buttons for which you have programmed macros.

1. Press the MACRO button

• MACRO indicator and MACRO is displayed on the LCD.

2. Press the numeric button for programmed

number and send the programmed code step by step.

↓

• The remote controller will do nothing if no macros are programmed.

The macro steps are executed in order. Also, the step numbers displayed on LCD

disappear as each step is executed.

3. After all macro commands have been

transmitted, the remote controller returns to AMP in normal mode.

EXAMPLES OF MACRO PROGRAMS

EXAMPLE 1

Change the input source for the unit to CD and play the 3rd track on a CD in the CD player.

1. Press and hold the MACRO and SET button

until the LEARN, MACRO indicators and MACRO are displayed blinking on the LCD.

2. Press the “1” button. M1-01 is displayed on

the LCD.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

ADVANCED OPERATION

ENGLISH

3. Press the AMP button and CD button. M1-

02 is displayed on the LCD.

Press the AMP.

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

Press the CD.

OPERATION

BASIC

4. Press the CD button and “3” button. M1-03

is displayed on the LCD.

Press the CD.

CONNECTIONS

ADVANCED

Press the “3”.

5. Press the CD button and 2 button.

SETUP

OPERATION

ADVANCED

6. When you are finished programming

the macro, press the ENTER button until

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

the MACRO indicator is disappeared and returns to normal mode.

Now, execute the macro you just

programmed.

7. Press the MACRO button and “1” button.

• The macro commands are transmitted to the components in order, and the steps of the operations are displayed on the LCD in order.

↓

Note

When programing the ampliﬁ er's input source in the macro program, ﬁ rst press the AMP button, and press the source button.

(In the case of DVD input: AMP → CD)

EXAMPLE 2

Turn this unit’s power on

↓

Turn the DVD player’s power on

↓

Change this unit’s input source to DVD

↓

Set the DVD player to play

To set the various steps of the macro, press

the following buttons in order:

(1) AMP → POWER ON.

↓

3.1.

(2) DVD → POWER ON.

↓

3.1.

(3) AMP → DVD.

↓

1. Press and hold the MACRO and SET buttons

until the LEARN, MACRO indicators and MACRO are displayed blinking on the LCD.

2. Press the “2” button. M2-01 is displayed on

the LCD.

(4) DVD → PLAY.

↓

4. When you are finished programming

the macro, press the ENTER button until MACRO indicator is disappeared on the LCD and returns to normal mode.

Now, execute the macro you just

programmed.

5. Press the MACRO button and “2” button.

• The macro commands are transmitted to the components in order, and the steps of the operations are displayed on the LCD in order.

ENGLISH

ADVANCED OPERATION

CLEARING MACRO PROGRAMS

The following procedure is used to erase macros you have programmed into the remote controller’s memory.

1. Press and hold the MACRO and MENU

button until the LEARN, MACRO indicators and MACRO are displayed blinking on the LCD.

2. Press and hold the CL button, then press

the button for the numeric button to be cleared for 3 seconds. (in this case “2”)

• M2-CL will be displayed blinking on the LCD.

3. Press the ENTER button to clear and return

step 1.

• To cancel the memory clearing operation, do not press ENTER button and simply touch any other button.

4. To return the normal mode, press and

hold down the ENTER button until MACRO indicator is disappeared on the LCD and returns to normal mode.

ADJUSTING THE INTERVAL TIME OF MACRO OPERATIONS TRANSMITTING

1. Press and hold the MACRO and SETUP

button until the SETUP is displayed on the LCD.

• SETUP is displayed for 3 seconds.

2. Conﬁ rm the display changes from SETUP

to MCRxx. (“xx” means the interval time of macro operations transmitting)

3. Press the cursor button (1 or 2) to change

the interval time.

• The interval time can be changed from

0.5 to 5 seconds by 0.5 seconds step.

4. Press and hold down the ENTER button

until MACRO indicator is disappeared on the LCD and returns to normal mode.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

ADVANCED OPERATION

SR5004 REMOTE CONTROLLER BASIC OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

ADVANCED

SETUP

OPERATION

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

NORMAL MODE

(When operating Marantz AV equipment products)

1. Press the SOURCE button.

For this example, press DVD. Pressing the SOURCE button once changes

the remote control to the settings for the source that was pressed.

To change the ampliﬁ er on other source,

press the SOURCE button twice (doubleclick). The code is sent, and then the ampliﬁ er source changes to DVD.

SETTING THE BACK LIGHT

Pressing the Light button located on the side of the remote controller lights the remote controller’s backlight. Pressing the button again while the backlight is lit lights the backlight for another 2 seconds. To turn off back light, press and hold down the SET and OFF button until SEND indicator blinks twice. To turn on it again, press and hold down the SET and ON button until SEND indicator blinks twice. Initial is back light ON.

PRESET MODE

(When operating non-Marantz AV equipment products)

See the attached manufacturer number list for the preset manufacturers, devices, preset numbers, and other settings.

Remote

controller

source name

TV TV Television DVD DVD DVD player CD CD CD player

DSS SATELLITE

BD BD

Importants

• Some codes may be not match your equipment. In this case, you can use LEARN mode to store

these codes.

• The preset codes do not cover full functions. If you need extra function, use LEARN mode to

store extra function.

• Wen the batteries are getting weak, the preset procedure is not successful.

Corresponding

preset code

Device name

Satellite broadcasting tuner equipment Blu-ray disc player

PROGRAMMING WITH THE 4-DIGIT CODE

Press and hold down the SOURCE button for the appliance which should be controlled and press SET button until the SEND indicator blinks twice. Then back light ﬂ ushes.

2. Press the 4-digit code by numeric buttons

for appliance (code table at the end of this book)

When the procedure is successful, the

SEND indicator will blink twice.

Note

If the indicator did not blink twice, then repeat steps 1 through 2 and try entering the same code again.

SCANNING THE CODE TABLE

1. Switch on the appliance which should be

controlled.

2. Press and hold down the SOURCE button

for appliance which should be controlled and press SET button until the SEND indicator blinking twice. Then back light ﬂ ushes.

3. Aim the remote control at the appliance

and slowly alternate between pressing INPUT 3 button and the SOURCE ON/OFF button for the appliance.

4. Stop when the appliance turns off.

5. Press ENTER button once to lock in the

code.

CHECKING THE CODE

1. Press and hold down the SOURCE button

for appliance which should be controlled and press SET button until the SEND indicator blinking twice then back light ﬂ ushes.

2. Press the INFO button. The SEND indicator will blink twice.

3. To view the code for first digit, press 1

once.

Count the SEND indicator blinks (e.g. 3

blinks = 3) and write down the number.

4. Then press 2 to check the second digit of

the code. Now press 3 and 4 to check the third and fourth digits of the code.

Note

If a code digit is “0”, the SEND indicator will not blink.

RESETTING THE CODE

1. Press and hold down the SOURCE button

for appliance which should be controlled and press SET button until the SEND indicator blinking twice.

Then back light ﬂ ushes.

2. Press the below codes to reset.

TV : 1000 DVD : 2000 CD : 3000 DSS : 4000 BD : 5000 The indicator will blink twice.

Note

After this procedure, the selected SOURCE button is set initial code.

ENGLISH

ADVANCED OPERATION

LEARN MODE

Notes

• This remote controller is capable to learn around 160 codes.

• When the batteries are getting weak , the learning procedure is not successful.

LEARNING PROCEDURE

1. Place the remote controller so that its

infrared signal transmitter is facing the infrared signal receiver on the Marantz remote controller at a distance of about

0.05 m (2 inches).

5 cm

2. Press and hold down the SET and SETUP

buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

3. Select the SOURCE button to select the

SOURCE.

4. Select the button to be learned.

• LEARN indicator lights up.

Notes

• The learning function is unavailable for all SOURCE buttons and HDMI button in any mode.

• The learning function is unavailable for all buttons in TUNER mode and AMP mode.

5. Press and hold the button of the original

remote controller to learn until the SEND indicator blinks twice.

Notes

• When the SEND indicator blinks once, repeat this step.

• If the LEARN indicator ﬂ ashes when the SEND indicator is lit, then the button cannot be learned.

• When the memory of the remote controller is full, the LEARN and SEND indicators blink once. If you want to learn the code, you should erase other learned button.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to learn other buttons

in same SOURCE.

7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 to learn other

SOURCE.

8. When you have ﬁ nished programming the

remote controller, press the SET button, then LEARN indicator stops blinking and exits from the LEARN mode.

Notes

• When the SEND indicator blinks once again, the transmitting code is unavailable for remote controller, or the transmitting signal is intercepted by noise.

• If no buttons are pressed for approximately 1 minutes while in the LEARN mode, the remote controller automatically exits from the LEARN mode.

ERASING PROGRAMMED CODES (RETURNING TO INITIAL SETTINGS)

Codes can be erased in three ways: by buttons, sources, and by all memory contents.

Erasing the code by buttons

1. Press and hold down the SET and SETUP

buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

2. Select the SOURCE button to select the

button to be erased.

3. Press and hold down the HDMI button

and press the learned button twice to be erased.

• SEND indicator blinks twice and the mode returns to LEARN mode.

4. To return the NORMAL mode, press the

SET button.

Erasing the code by SOURCE

1. Press and hold down the SET and SETUP

buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

2. Press and hold down the HDMI button and

press the learned SOURCE button twice to be erased.

• LEARN indicator lights.

3. Press ENTER button to continue erasing.

• The SEND indicator blinks twice and the mode returns to LEARN mode.

• To cancel the erasing operation, do not press ENTER button and simply touch any other button.

4. To return the NORMAL mode, press the

SET button.

ERASING THE ALL SOURCES

1. Press and hold down the SET and SETUP

buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

2. Press and hold down the HDMI button and

press POWER ON and POWER OFF button.

• LEARN indicator lights.

3. Press ENTER button to continue erasing.

• The SEND indicator blinks twice and the mode returns to LEARN mode.

• To cancel the erasing operation, do not press ENTER button and simply touch any other button.

4. To return the NORMAL mode, press the SET

button.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

Note

Erasing codes will return to the factory preset code, or there will leave empty if the button has no factory preset code.

OTHERS

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

ENGLISH

TROUBLESHOOTING

If you have any problem using this product, please be sure to check the items in the following table. If you trouble cannot be solved, please unplug the power cable immediately and contact your Marantz authorized dealer or service center.

CONNECTIONS

GENERAL

BASIC

Symptom Cause Solution Page

OPERATION

The unit does not turn on.

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

ADVANCED

There is no sound.

SETUP

There is no sound from a certain speaker.

The sound image does not localize

OPERATION

correctly and is

ADVANCED

unnatural.

TROUBLESHOOTING

The STANDBY indicator is blinking slowly (twice a second).

OTHERS

The STANDBY indicator is blinking fast (8 times a second).

Check the AC power cable connection.

The AC power cable is improperly connected.

The input cables are not fully connected.

The input selector is in the wrong position.

The volume is too low. Adjust the volume. The mute function has been

activated. Headphones are connected to the

unit. The speaker is improperly

connected.

• The polarity (+/–) of some speaker cables is incorrect.

• Speaker position and speaker cable connections are incorrect.

• The speaker cable has shortcircuited.

• The unit was played at a higher volume than it was designed to be played.

• You are using speakers with lower impedance than required.

• The unit was placed and used on a narrow rack or similar conﬁ ned space and became overheated inside.

There may be something wrong with the unit.

Make sure the AC power cable is ﬁ rmly inserted into the unit.

Make sure the power plug is ﬁ rmly inserted into the power outlet.

Check the connection of the input cables between this unit and the source component (CD player, etc.), referring to the connection diagram.

Set the input selector to the input terminal to which the source component (CD player, etc.) is connected.

Cancel the mute function.

Remove the headphones.

Refer to the connection diagram to properly connect the speaker.

Unplug the AC power cable and check the speaker cable connections.

• Unplug the AC power cable and check the speaker cable connections.

• Turn the volume down a bit.

• Always use speakers with the required impedance.

• For safety's sake, always leave enough space around the unit.

• Use the remote controller to turn on the power.

• If the same problem occurs again, unplug the AC power cable and have the unit serviced at the nearest service center.

Immediately unplug the AC power cable and have the unit serviced at the nearest service center.

Symptom Cause Solution Page

The display is not displaying properly.

Cannot use the remote controller to operate the unit.

The main unit's volume control and buttons do not work.

A hissing noise (residual noise) is generated when there is no input signal.

‒

The unit uses a computer that on rare occasions can malfunction if affected by static electricity, lightning or so on.

The batteries are dead. The remote controller is out of

range. There is an obstacle between the

unit and remote controller. Strong light is falling on the unit's

infrared receptor window. The mode of the remote controller

is improperly set. The unit is set to IR = DISABLE.

The front key (button) lock has been set.

The unit has a surround DSP, which can sometimes make a noticeable hissing noise.

Unplug the AC power cable and then plug it in again.

Replace the batteries with new ones.

Use the remote controller within range of the unit.

Remove the obstacle. Prevent strong light from falling on

the infrared receptor window. Press the remote controller's AMP

button before operating. Change the setting to IR =

ENABLE.

Release the front key (button) lock.

If the noise bothers you when listening to a 2CH source, listen in SOURCE DIRECT mode.

ENGLISH

TROUBLESHOOTING

SURROUND

Symptom Cause Solution Page

There is no sound from a certain speaker.

There is no sound from the front speaker.

There is no sound from the center speaker.

There is no sound from the surround speakers.

There is no sound from the surround back speakers. (Models with 7.1 or more channels)

There is no sound from the subwoofer.

ES/EX mode cannot be selected.

No sound has been recorded on that channel.

• An AM program, TV sound or other monaural source is being played in a surround mode other than STEREO.

• The speaker selector has not been set to the correct position. (It is at OFF or B.)

The surround mode is set to STEREO.

Center = None is selected on the Speakers Size menu.

The surround mode is set to STEREO.

Surround = None has been selected on the Speakers Size menu. The surround mode has not been set to a 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround mode such as EX/ES or PLIIx. Surround Back = None or the ZONE speakers have been selected on the Speakers Size menu. Connection has been made to the SURROUND BACK R terminal even though the surround back speakers are used at the 1ch setting.

• The subwoofer is not turned on.

• The subwoofer level is too low.

• Subwoofer = No is selected on the Spearkers Size menu.

• Front = Large and Bass Mix = Mix have been set on the Speakers Size menu, and an analog or PCM source is being played.

The playback source does not contain any LFE or sound in the low range.

Surround Back = 1ch or 2ch has not been selected on the Speakers Size menu.

There is no interchangeability in the input signals.

Check the program channel indicator.

• Sound is heard from the center speaker. There is nothing wrong with the unit.

• Set the speaker selector to the correct position.

When the surround mode is set to STEREO, no sound is emitted from the center speaker. Set unit to another surround mode.

Set Center to Small or Large. When the surround mode is set to

STEREO, no sound is emitted from the surround speakers. Set the unit to another surround mode.

Set Surround to Small or Large.

See the surround mode table.

Set Surround Back to 1ch or 2ch.

Connect a speaker to the SURROUND BACK L terminal when Surround Back has been set to 1ch.

• Turn on the power to the subwoofer.

• Raise the subwoofer level.

• Select Subwoofer = Yes.

• When the Bass Mix = Both setting is selected, the bass components are played from the front speakers and subwoofer, and the sound heard may be unnatural because of interference.

Set Surround Back to 1ch or 2ch.

Use a 5.1 channel source.

Symptom Cause Solution Page

Cannot select NEO:6 mode.

‒

CSII mode cannot be selected.

NIGHT mode does not function.

Cannot select the desired surround mode.

A noise is generated during playback of DTSencoded CDs, etc.

Cannot play back audio like Dolby Digital or DTS. (Indicator does not light up.)

Cannot play back audio like Dolby TrueHD or DTS-HD. (Indicator does not light up.)

When playing a CD on a DVD player, the next track is played with part

of the beginning missing when track skipping, etc., is conducted.

There is no interchangeability in the input signals.

A source that is not recorded in Dolby Digital is being played.

The surround modes available are limited by input signal and speaker settings.

• The unit is connected using an analog connection.

• The player is conducting search playback.

• Some inappropriate digital processing (level adjustment, change of sampling frequency, etc.) is happening in the player.

• The digital signal output of the player, etc., is set to PCM.

• The unit is connected using an analog connection.

• The player or other source component does not support these audio mode outputs.

• The audio output of the player is set improperly.

• The HDMI connections have not been performed.

Depending on the player, the digital signal may be interrupted when a track is skipped. The beginning of the song may be slightly interrupted in order to determine the surround system.

Use 2-channel DTS input signals, PCM input signals or analog input signals.

Use 2-channel Dolby Digital input signals, PCM input signals or analog input signals.

Use a source recorded in Dolby Digital.

See the surround mode table.

• Use a digital (optical or coaxial) or HDMI connection.

• Noise may occur during search playback depending on the component. There is nothing wrong with the unit.

• See the player's instruction manual.

• See the instruction manual of the player, etc.

• Use a digital (optical or coaxial) or HDMI connection.

• Connect a component (with HDMI version 1.3a or higher) that supports Dolby TrueHD and DTSHD.

• Set the output so that the source component will be able to output these audio modes.

If using such a DVD player, you can play back the audio without problem by using an analog connection.

‒

12,14

‒

12,14

‒

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

TROUBLESHOOTING

ENGLISH

VIDEO

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

ADVANCED

SETUP

OPERATION

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

Symptom Cause Solution Page

No image on the monitor TV.

The audio or the image does not match the selected source.

Cannot record to a VCR, etc.

The converted video signals are disturbed.

• The monitor TV connection, input switching, etc., are not set up correctly.

• The unit has an HDMI connection to the source component, but no HDMI connection to the monitor TV.

The input cables are incorrectly connected.

• The video recording component jack does not match the source component jack.

• A copy-protected signal is being received.

When special playback is performed by the video deck, the conversion may not be carried out normally, causing the video signals to be disturbed and preventing the images from being shown.

• See the monitor TV's instruction manual.

• Make an HDMI connection to the monitor TV.

Connect the cables properly, referring to the connection diagram.

• Make sure the recording component jack matches the source component jack. (VIDEO or S-VIDEO)

• Video signals that include copyprotected signals cannot be recorded.

Connect a monitor TV using the same format (video, s-video or component) as the source component.

–

12 - 14

–

HDMI

Symptom Cause Solution Page

There is no picture with the HDMI connection.

It takes time for the image to be displayed over an HDMI connection.

There is no audio playback over an HDMI connection.

The HDMI cable is improperly connected.

The unit is connected with a nonspec HDMI cable.

The connection between components over an HDMI connection has not been authenticated.

The HDMI settings are incorrect.

The unit is connected to the video component (TV, projector, etc.) by DVI connector.

The power to the unit is turned off. (HDMI connections are not enabled when the unit is in STANDBY mode.)

The connection is being authenticated between components on the HDMI connection.

The HDMI settings are incorrect.

HDMI audio through mode is established.

Check the HDMI cable connection. 14 Use of a cable no longer than 5

meters is recommended to ensure stable operation, prevent picture degradation, etc.

Turn the power on again to all the components on the HDMI connection.

Make sure the unit's HDMI settings are correct.

Set the unit for HDMI input, as explained in the instruction manual of the video component (TV, projector, etc.).

Make settings to enable HDMI output, as explained in the instruction manual of the source component (Blu-ray disc player, Set Top Box, etc.).

Match the resolution for both components, as explained in the instruction manual of the component on the HDMI connection.

Connect an HDCP-compatible video component.

Turn on the main power to the unit. 16

Some HDMI components require time for authentication. There is nothing wrong with the unit.

Make settings to enable HDMI audio output, as explained in the instruction manual of the source component (Blu-ray disc player, Set Top Box, etc.).

Set so that the HDMI audio output setting matches the signals supported by the unit, as explained in the instruction manual of the source component (Blu-ray disc player, Set Top Box, etc.).

No sound can be delivered from the unit in this mode. Select the Enable setting.

–

ENGLISH

TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom Cause Solution Page

No sound is heard from the monitor TV connected to the HDMI terminal.

Image and audio are unstable over an HDMI connection. (There is noise, the stream is interrupted, etc.)

HDMI audio enable mode is established.

The connection uses a long cable.

No sound is heard from the monitor TV in Enable mode. Select Through.

Use a short cable. Use of a cable no longer than 5 meters is recommended.

Use a Category 2 (high-speed supported) cable.

TUNER

Symptom Cause Solution Page

Cannot receive AM or FM signals.

A noise is generated when receiving an AM signal.

A noise is generated when receiving an FM signal.

The antennas have not been connected properly.

The unit is receiving interference from other components.

The signal from the broadcasting station is weak.

Make sure the AM and FM antennas are properly connected to the AM and FM antenna terminals, respectively.

Change the location of the AM antenna.

Install an outdoor FM antenna. 15

USB (SR6004 ONLY)

Symptom Cause Solution Page

Even when the USB storage device is connected, “NO DEVICE” remains on the status display, and the device is not recognized.

“CHECK DEVICE” appears on the status display when the USB storage device is connected.

• The unit cannot recognize the USB storage device because of connection trouble or some other issue.

• A device that cannot be recognized by the unit has been connected.

• The device has been connected through a USB hub.

• Check whether the USB storage device and USB cable are ﬁ rmly plugged into the unit's USB connector.

• Try removing the USB storage device from the unit, and reconnecting it.

• Try turning the unit’s power off and back on, and re-connecting the device.

• Even when a USB storage device complies with the USB Mass Storage Class standard, it may not be possible to play its ﬁ les using the unit. (This does not mean that something is wrong with the unit itself.)

• USB storage devices cannot be connected through a USB hub.

Symptom Cause Solution Page

“CHECK FS” appears on the status display when a USB

–

storage device is connected.

“!OVER CURRENT!” appears on the status display when a USB storage device is connected.

“NO AUDIO FILE” appears on the status display when a USB storage device is connected.

“CHECK FILE” appears on the status display when a USB storage device is connected.

The ﬁ les recorded on the USB storage device are not displayed.

“PRESS TOP KEY” appears on the status display.

“PRESS MODE KEY” appears on the status display.

“CHECK iPod” appears on the status display.

• A format other than FAT16 or FAT32 is used as the USB storage device’s format.

• A USB storage device that has been formatted using a ﬁ le system not supported by the unit is being used.

The overcurrent protection function of the unit’s USB connector has been triggered.

No playable ﬁ les have been recorded on a USB storage device.

• An attempt has been made to play a copyright-protected ﬁ le.

• The ﬁ le is damaged. Alternatively, its extension and ﬁ le structure are incompatible.

• The USB storage device is partitioned into a number of partitions.

• The number of folders exceeds 700 or the number of ﬁ les exceeds 65535.

The ﬁ le cannot be read properly.

An iPod not supported by the unit's direct mode has been connected.

The iPod could not be detected properly.

• Set the format to FAT16 or FAT32, and record the ﬁ les.

• Use a USB storage device that has been formatted using a ﬁ le system supported by the unit.

No guarantees are made for the operation of a hard disk drive that is powered from the unit's USB connector. Remove the connected USB storage device, and turn the unit's power off and back on.

Record the supported ﬁ le on a USB storage device.

• The unit cannot play copyrightprotected ﬁ les.

• Check the ﬁ le.

• If the device is partitioned into a number of partitions, displays only for the ﬁ rst partition will appear.

• No displays appear for folders after folder no.700 or for ﬁ les after ﬁ le no.65535.

Press the TOP button, and try rereading the ﬁ le.

Press the SETUP/MODE button, and use the iPod in remote mode.

Turn off the unit's power and turn it back on. If the iPod still cannot be detected, reset the iPod. For details on how to reset the iPod, refer to the iPod's operating instructions.

–

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

–

BASIC

OPERATION

–

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

–

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

–

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

TROUBLESHOOTING

ENGLISH

FRONT KEY (BUTTON) LOCK OF THE UNIT

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

BASIC

The keys (buttons) on the front panel of the unit (except POWER ON/STANDBY) can be locked so that, except for remote control operations, none of

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

the unit's operations will be acknowledged.

ADVANCED

HOW TO LOCK THE FRONT KEYS (BUTTONS)

1. Hold down both the PURE DIRECT and EXIT

buttons on the front panel simultaneously for at least 3 seconds.



2. “F-KEY LOCK!” is indicated on the display,

SETUP

and no further operations initiated by the front panel buttons, with the exception of POWER ON/STANDBY, are acknowledged.

HOW TO RELEASE THE FRONT KEY

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

(BUTTON) LOCK

1. Again hold down both the PURE DIRECT

and EXIT buttons on the front panel simultaneously for at least 3 seconds.

2. “F-KEY UNLOCK” is indicated on the

display, and the lock is released.

PURE DIRECT

EXIT

GENERAL MALFUNCTION

If the equipment malfunctions, this may be because an electrostatic discharge or AC line interference has corrupted the information in the equipment memory circuits. Therefore:

- disconnect the plug from the AC line supply

- after waiting at least three minutes, reconnect the plug to the AC line supply

- re-attempt to operate the equipment

MEMORY BACKUP

In case a power outage occurs or the power cord is accidentally unplugged, this unit is equipped with a backup function to prevent memory data such as the preset memory from being erased.

HOW TO RESET THE UNIT

SURR. MODE

Should the operation or display seem to be abnormal, reset the unit with the following procedure. This unit is turned on, press and hold the SURR. MODE + CLEAR buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds or more. Remember that the procedure will reset the settings of the function selector, Surround mode, delay time, TUNER PRESET etc., to their initial settings.

CLEAR

OTHERS

ENGLISH

SURROUND MODE

This unit is equipped with many surround modes. These are provided to reproduce a variety of surround sound effects, according to the content of the source to be played. The available surround modes may be restricted depending on the input signal and speaker setup.

THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE SELECTED SURROUND MODE AND THE INPUT SIGNAL

The surround mode is selected with the surround mode selector on the unit or the remote controller. However, the sound you hear is subject to the relationship between the selected surround mode and the input signal. That relationship is as follows:

Surround Mode

AUTO Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX

SOURCE DIRECT PURE DIRECT

Input Signal Decoding

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Digital 2.0 Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic IIx movie Dolby Digital Plus (2ch) DolbyDigital + Dolby Digital Plus (5.1ch) Dolby Digital Plus (6.1ch) Dolby Digital Plus (7.1ch) Dolby TrueHD (2ch) DolbyTrueHD Dolby TrueHD (5.1ch) DolbyTrueHD Dolby TrueHD (6.1ch) DolbyTrueHD Dolby TrueHD (7.1ch) DolbyTrueHD Dolby TrueHD 192kHz (5.1ch) DTS-ES DTS-ES DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 DTS-HD (2ch) DTS-HD DTS-HD (5.1ch) DTS-HD DTS-HD (6.1ch) DTS-HD DTS-HD (7.1ch) DTS-HD DTS Express DTS EXPRESS Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz Multi Ch-PCM 192kHz Multi Ch-PCM 192kHz SA-CD (5.1ch) SA-CD (5.1ch) SA-CD (2ch) SA-CD (Stereo) PCM (Audio) PCM (Stereo) PCM 96kHz PCM (Stereo 96kHz) HDCD HDCD Analog Stereo

7.1ch input Multi Ch Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Digital 2.0 Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic IIx movie Dolby Digital Plus (2ch) DolbyDigital + Dolby Digital Plus (5.1ch) DolbyDigital + Dolby Digital Plus (6.1ch) DolbyDigital + Dolby Digital Plus (7.1ch) DolbyDigital + Dolby TrueHD (2ch) DolbyTrueHD Dolby TrueHD (5.1ch) DolbyTrueHD Dolby TrueHD (6.1ch) DolbyTrueHD Dolby TrueHD (7.1ch) DolbyTrueHD Dolby TrueHD 192kHz (5.1ch) DTS-ES DTS-ES DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 DTS-HD (2ch) DTS-HD DTS-HD (5.1ch) DTS-HD DTS-HD (6.1ch) DTS-HD DTS-HD (7.1ch) DTS-HD DTS Express DTS EXPRESS Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz Multi Ch-PCM 192kHz Multi Ch-PCM 192kHz SA-CD (5.1ch) SA-CD (5.1ch)

DolbyDigital + DolbyDigital + DolbyDigital +

DolbyTrueHD

Output Channel Front information display

SLSRHLHRSBL

L/R C

‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡–‡‡ ‡‡ ‡–‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡

– ––

–– – –

–

–– – –

––

–– – –

–– – – –– – ––‡dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE ––‡dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

–– – –‡dts-HD MSTR/HIRES L, R

––‡dts-HD MSTR/HIRES L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2) – – ––‡dts express L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE ––‡PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE ––‡PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE ––‡PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

––‡DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE –– – –‡DSD L, R –– – –‡PCM L, R –– – –‡PCM L, R –– – –‡PCM, HDCD L, R –– – –‡ANALOG -

–

–– –––––

– –––––

––

–

– –––––

––

–

––

–

––

––‡dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE –––––

––‡dts-HD MSTR/HIRES L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

–

––‡dts express L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

––‡PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

––

––‡PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

––‡DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Signal format

SubW

SBR

indicators

‡‡

‡‡ ‡‡

‡‡

‡‡ ‡‡

‡‡

‡‡ ‡‡

‡‡

‡‡ ‡‡

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

‡

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

‡

DIGITAL L, R

DIGITAL L, R, S

‡

DIGITAL PLUS L, R

‡

DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1)

DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE

‡

TrueHD L, R

‡

TrueHD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

TrueHD L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

TrueHD

‡

TrueHD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

dts-HD MSTR/HIRES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1,ex2) dts-HD MSTR/HIRES

ANALOG -

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

‡

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DIGITAL L, R

DIGITAL L, R, S

DIGITAL PLUS L, R

‡

DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1)

DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE

TrueHD L, R

‡

TrueHD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

TrueHD L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

TrueHD

‡

TrueHD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

‡

dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

dts-HD MSTR/HIRES L, R

dts-HD MSTR/HIRES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1,ex2) dts-HD MSTR/HIRES

‡

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Channel status

L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

Surround Mode

SOURCE DIRECT PURE DIRECT

EX/ES Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX

DOLBY PL

DOLBY (PLIIx movie) (PLIIx music) (PLIIx game)

DTS (Neo:6 Cinema) (Neo:6 Music)

Input Signal Decoding

SA-CD (2ch) SA-CD (Stereo) PCM (Audio) PCM (Stereo) PCM 96kHz PCM (Stereo 96kHz) HDCD HDCD Analog Stereo

7.1ch input Multi Ch

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital Plus (5.1ch) DolbyDigital + +EX Dolby TrueHD (5.1ch) DolbyTrueHD +EX DTS-ES DTS-ES DTS (5.1ch) DTS-ES DTS-HD (5.1) DTS-HD + NEO6

Multi-PCM

SA-CD (5.1ch)

z Dolby Surr.EX

Dolby D (5.1ch)

Dolby D (2ch) PLIIz Dolby D (2ch Surr) PLIIz Dolby Digital Plus (2ch) PLIIz Dolby Digital Plus (5.1ch) Dolby Digital Plus (6.1ch) Dolby Digital Plus (7.1ch) Dolby TrueHD (2ch) PLIIz Dolby TrueHD (5.1ch) DolbyTrueHD + PLIIz Dolby TrueHD (6.1ch) DolbyTrueHD + PLIIz Dolby TrueHD (7.1ch) DolbyTrueHD + PLIIz DTS-HD (2ch) PLIIz Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + PLIIz SA-CD (5.1ch) SA-CD (5.1ch) + PLIIz SA-CD (2ch) PLIIz PCM (Audio) PLIIz HDCD PLIIz Analog PLIIz Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby D (2ch) Pro Logic IIx Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic IIx Dolby Digital Plus (2ch) Pro Logic IIx Dolby Digital Plus (5.1ch) DolbyDigital + Dolby Digital Plus (5.1ch) Dolby TrueHD (2ch) Pro Logic IIx Dolby TrueHD (5.1ch) DolbyTrueHD + PLIIx Dolby TrueHD (5.1ch) DolbyTrueHD DTS-HD (2ch) DTS-HD Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + PLIIx SA-CD (5.1ch) SA-CD (5.1ch) + PLIIx SA-CD (2ch) Pro Logic IIx PCM (Audio) Pro Logic IIx HDCD Pro Logic IIx Analog Pro Logic IIx DTS-ES DTS 5.1 DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 DTS-HD (2ch) Neo:6 DTS-HD (5.1ch) DTS-HD DTS-HD (6.1ch) DTS-HD

DTS-HD (7.1ch) DTS-HD

Dolby D (2ch) Neo:6 Dolby D (2ch Surr) Neo:6 Dolby Digital Plus (2ch) Neo:6 Dolby TrueHD (2ch) Neo:6 SA-CD (2ch) Neo:6 PCM (Audio) Neo:6 HDCD Neo:6 Analog Neo:6

Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby Digital EX SA-CD (5.1ch) + Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital 5.1 + PLIIz Dolby Digital 5.1+ + PLIIz

DolbyDigital Plus + PLIIz DolbyDigital Plus + PLIIz DolbyDigital Plus + PLIIz

Dolby Digital 5.1 + PLIIx

Dolby Digital Plus + PLIIx

Output Channel Front information display

SLSRHLHRSBL

L/R C

‡

–– – –

‡

–––––

‡

–––––

‡

–––––

‡

–––––

‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡

‡‡ ‡

‡‡ ‡ ‡–‡

‡‡ ‡ ‡

‡‡ ‡ ‡–‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡–‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡–‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡–‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡–‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡–‡‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡–‡‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡

‡‡ ‡–‡‡

‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡

– – – – – – – –

–

––

–– ––

– – – ––

– – –– – – – – – – – ––‡dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE ––‡dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE ––‡dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE – ––‡dts-HD MSTR/HIRES L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2) –

– – – – – – – –

Signal format

SubW

SBR

indicators

‡

DSD L, R PCM L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

‡‡

ANALOG -

‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡

‡‡

–

– –

–

– – – – – –

‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡

‡‡ ‡‡

‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡

‡‡

‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

TrueHD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts-HD MSTR/HIRES L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, SW

DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, SW

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

‡

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DIGITAL L, R

‡

DIGITAL L, R, S

‡

DIGITAL PLUS L, R

DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, S,LFE

DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE

‡

TrueHD L, R

‡

TrueHD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

‡

TrueHD L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

‡

TrueHD

TrueHD L, R

‡

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

‡

DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

‡

DSD L, R

‡

PCM L, R

‡

PCM, HDCD L, R

‡

ANALOG –

‡

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

‡

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DIGITAL L, R

DIGITAL L, R, S

DIGITAL PLUS L, R

‡

DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

TrueHD L, R

TrueHD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

‡

TrueHD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

TrueHD L, R

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DSD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

dts-HD MSTR/HIRES L, R

dts-HD MSTR/HIRES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

dts-HD MSTR/HIRES

DIGITAL L, R

DIGITAL L, R, S

DIGITAL PLUS L, R

TrueHD L, R

DSD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

Channel status

L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERSOTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

OTHERS

Surround Mode

CSII (Cinema /Music / Mono)

BASIC

NEURAL- THX Dolby D (2ch) NEURAL_THX

STEREO Dolby Surr.EX Stereo

BASIC

ADVANCED

SETUP

Dolby Virtual

ADVANCED

Speaker

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERSOTHERS

Input Signal Decoding

Dolby D (2ch) CSII Dolby D (2ch Surr) CSII SA-CD (2ch) CSII PCM (Audio) CSII HDCD CSII Analog CSII

Dolby D (2ch Surr) NEURAL_THX SA-CD (2ch) NEURAL_THX PCM (Audio) NEURAL_THX HDCD NEURAL_THX Analog NEURAL_THX

Dolby D (5.1ch) Stereo Dolby D (2ch) Stereo Dolby D (2ch Surr) Stereo Dolby Digital Plus (2ch) Stereo Dolby Digital Plus (5.1ch) Stereo Dolby Digital Plus (6.1ch) Stereo Dolby Digital Plus (7.1ch) Stereo Dolby TrueHD (2ch) Stereo Dolby TrueHD (5.1ch) Stereo Dolby TrueHD (6.1ch) Stereo Dolby TrueHD (7.1ch) Stereo Dolby TrueHD 192kHz(5.1ch) DTS-ES Stereo DTS 96/24 Stereo DTS (5.1ch) Stereo DTS-HD (2ch) Stereo DTS-HD (5.1ch) Stereo DTS-HD (6.1ch) Stereo

DTS-HD (7.1ch) Stereo

DTS Express Stereo Multi Ch-PCM Stereo Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz Stereo Multi Ch-PCM 192kHz Stereo SA-CD (5.1ch) Stereo SA-CD (2ch) Stereo PCM (Audio) Stereo PCM 96kHz Stereo HDCD Stereo Analog Stereo Dolby Surr.EX Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby D (2ch) Dolby D (2ch Surr) Dolby Digital Plus (2ch) Dolby Digital Plus (5.1ch) Dolby Digital Plus (6.1ch) Dolby Digital Plus (7.1ch) Dolby TrueHD (2ch) Dolby TrueHD (5.1ch) Dolby TrueHD (6.1ch) Dolby TrueHD (7.1ch) DTS-ES DTS 96/24 DTS (5.1ch) DTS-HD (2ch) DTS-HD (5.1ch) DTS-HD (6.1ch)

DTS-HD (7.1ch)

Multi Ch-PCM SA-CD (5.1ch) SA-CD (2ch) PCM (Audio) HDCD Analog

Stereo

Dolby Virtual Speaker‡–––––2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE Dolby Virtual Speaker‡–––––2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE PLII+ Dolby Virtual Speaker‡–––––2 DIGITAL L, R PLII+ Dolby Virtual Speaker‡–––––2 DIGITAL L, R, S Dolby Virtual Speaker‡–––––2 DIGITAL PLUS L, R Dolby Virtual Speaker‡–––––2 DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Dolby Virtual Speaker‡–––––2 DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1) Dolby Virtual Speaker‡–––––2 DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE Dolby Virtual Speaker‡–––––2 TrueHD L, R Dolby Virtual Speaker‡–––––2 TrueHD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Dolby Virtual Speaker‡–––––2 TrueHD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Dolby Virtual Speaker‡–––––2 TrueHD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Dolby Virtual Speaker‡––––– Dolby Virtual Speaker‡––––– Dolby Virtual Speaker‡––––– Dolby Virtual Speaker‡––––– Dolby Virtual Speaker‡––––– Dolby Virtual Speaker‡–––––

Dolby Virtual Speaker‡–––––

Dolby Virtual Speaker‡––––– Dolby Virtual Speaker‡––––– PLII+ Dolby Virtual Speaker‡––––– PLII+ Dolby Virtual Speaker‡––––– PLII+ Dolby Virtual Speaker‡––––– PLII+ Dolby Virtual Speaker‡–––––

Output Channel Front information display

SLSRHLHRSBL

L/R C

‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡

‡

‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡

–

– –––– –––– –––– –––– –––– –––– –––– –––– –––– –––– –––– –––– –––– ––––‡dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE ––––‡dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE ––––‡dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE ––––‡dts-HD MSTR/HIRES L, R ––––‡dts-HD MSTR/HIRES L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2) ––––‡dts-HD MSTR/HIRES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

––––‡dts-HD MSTR/HIRES ––––‡dts express L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

––––‡PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE ––––‡PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE ––––‡PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE ––––‡DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE ––––‡DSD L, R ––––‡PCM L, R ––––‡PCM L, R ––––‡PCM, HDCD L, R ––––‡ANALOG -

Signal format

SubW

SBR

indicators

‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡

DIGITAL L, R

DIGITAL L, R, S

DSD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

DIGITAL L, R

DIGITAL L, R, S

DSD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

‡

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

‡

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

‡

DIGITAL L, R

‡

DIGITAL L, R, S

‡

DIGITAL PLUS L, R

‡

DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

‡

DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1)

‡

DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE

‡

TrueHD L, R

‡

TrueHD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

‡

TrueHD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

‡

TrueHD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

‡

TrueHD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts-HD MSTR/HIRES L, R dts-HD MSTR/HIRES L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2) dts-HD MSTR/HIRES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

dts-HD MSTR/HIRES

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DSD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

Channel status

L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

Surround Mode

Multi Ch. Movie Music

(‡): Movie mode only. Headphone (DolbyHP or Normal Headphone)

Input Signal Decoding

Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 Dolby D (2ch) Multi Channel Dolby D (2ch Surr) Multi Channel DTS-ES DTS-ES DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz SA-CD (5.1ch) SA-CD (5.1ch) SA-CD (2ch) Multi Channel PCM (Audio) Multi Channel HDCD Multi Channel

Analog Multi Channel

Dolby Surr.EX Dolby H.P Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby H.P Dolby D (2ch) Dolby H.P Dolby D (2ch Surr) Dolby H.P Dolby Digital Plus (5.1ch) Stereo Dolby Digital Plus (6.1ch) Stereo Dolby Digital Plus (7.1ch) Stereo Dolby TrueHD (5.1ch) Stereo Dolby TrueHD (6.1ch) Stereo Dolby TrueHD (7.1ch) Stereo Dolby TrueHD 192kHz(5.1ch) DTS-ES Dolby H.P DTS 96/24 Dolby H.P DTS (5.1ch) Dolby H.P DTS-HD (5.1ch) Stereo DTS-HD (6.1ch) Stereo

DTS-HD (7.1ch) Stereo

DTS Express Stereo Multi Ch-PCM Dolby H.P PCM Dolby H.P HDCD Dolby H.P ANALOG Dolby H.P

Stereo

Notes

• Dolby Digital (2 channel L/R): Speakers for signal with Dolby Surround are fully equipped.

• No sound is outputs from the surround speaker, center speaker and subwoofer if the DVD disc has no surround data.

• Surround modes other than Stereo are not available during Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, or DTS-HD playback.

If surround modes other than Stereo are selected

and Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, or DTSHD content is played, the surround mode setting is disabled.

Output Channel Front information display

SLSRHLHRSBL

L/R C

‡

(‡)

–

‡

(‡)

‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡

‡

‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡

‡

‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡

––

‡

(‡)

–

‡

(‡)

–

‡

(‡)

–

‡

(‡)

––‡dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

‡

(‡)

––‡dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

‡

(‡)

––‡PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

‡

(‡)

––‡PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

‡

(‡)

––‡DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

‡

(‡)

–

‡

(‡)

–

‡

(‡)

–

‡

(‡)

–

–––––2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE –––––2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE –––––2 DIGITAL L, R –––––2 DIGITAL L, R, S –––––2 DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE –––––2 DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1) –––––2 DIGITAL PLUS L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE –––––2 TrueHD L, R –––––2 TrueHD L, R –––––2 TrueHD L, R –––––2 TrueHD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE ––––– ––––– ––––– ––––– –––––

––––– –––––

––––– ––––– ––––– –––––

Signal format

SubW

SBR

indicators

‡‡

‡‡ ‡‡ ‡‡

‡‡

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

‡

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DIGITAL L, R

DIGITAL L, R, S

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DSD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R

ANALOG -

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts-HD MSTR/HIRES L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (,ex1,ex2) dts-HD MSTR/HIRES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

dts-HD MSTR/HIRES

dts express L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG L, R

Channel status

L, C, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, LFE (,ex1,ex2)

Abbreviations L/R : Front speakers C : Center speaker SL/SR : Surround speakers HL/HR : Front height speakers SBL/SBR : Surround back speakers SubW : Subwoofer LFE : Low frequency efects ex : Extension

ENGLISH

OTHERS

AUTO

When this mode is selected, the unit determines whether the digital input signal is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Surround EX, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, DTS, DTS-ES, DTS 96/24 or PCM audio. Surround EX & DTS-ES will operate for multichannel sources that have a Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES auto trigger ﬂ ag in the digital signal. When a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input, the number of channels for which the corresponding signal is encoded will be played. Inputting a Dolby Digital two channel signal with Dolby surround status automatically subjects that signal to Pro Logic IIx movie processing before play. PCM 96 kHz source material can be played in this mode.

Notes

• When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD players, performing operations such as skip or stop may momentarily interrupt the output.

• When the signal is not decoded, the mode is changed to AUTO mode automatically. See page 73 to conﬁ rm the available decoding modes.

SOURCE DIRECT

In the Source Direct mode, the tone control circuit Acoustic EQ. and bass management conﬁ guration are bypassed for full-range frequency response and the purist audio reproduction.

Notes

• Speaker size is set to Front L/R = Large, Center = Large, Surround L/R = Large and Subwoofer = Yes automatically. Tone controls, equalizer and additional processing are deactivated.

• When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD players, performing operations such as skip or stop may momentarily interrupt the output.

• In SOURCE DIRECT mode, ACOUSTIC EQ and M-DAX are not available.

PURE DIRECT

The Pure Direct mode further reduces sources of noise in addition to effect of the Source Direct mode, by blocking output from the video jacks (VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT VIDEO and HDMI) and turning the FL display off.

Note

• In PURE DIRECT mode, ACOUSTIC EQ and MDAX are not available.

EX/ES

This mode provides 6.1 channel surround for Dolby Digital EX, and DTS-ES-encoded source material such as DVD. This mode cannot be used when an analog input has been selected.

Dolby Digital EX

In a movie theater, ﬁ lm soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called surround back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before. Dolby Digital EX is not available in systems that do not have without surround back speaker(s).

DTS-ES (Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1)

DTS-ES adds the surround center channel audio to the DTS 5.1 channel format to improve the acoustic positioning, and makes acoustic image movement more natural with the 6.1 channel reproduction. This unit incorporates a DTS-ES-decoder, which can handle DTS-ES Discrete-encoded and DTS-ES Matrix-encoded program sources from DVD, etc. DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 features digital discrete recording of all channels, including the surround back channel(s), and higher quality audio reproduction. DTS-ES is not available in systems that do not have surround back speakers.

2 MODE

(Dolby Digital, Pro Logic IIx MOVIE, Pro Logic IIx MUSIC, Pro Logic IIx GAME)

This mode is used with source materials encoded in Dolby Digital and Dolby Surround.

DOLBY DIGITAL

This mode is enabled when playing source materials encoded in Dolby Digital. Playing multichannel-encoded 5.1 channel Dolby Digital sources provides 5 main audio channels (left, center, right, surround left and surround right) and a Low Frequency Effect channel. Dolby Digital EX decoding is not available in this mode.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx has 5 modes:

Pro Logic IIx MOVIE

This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround sound from Dolby Surround, encoded stereo movie soundtracks.

Pro Logic IIx MUSIC

This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround sound from conventional stereo sources (analog or digital), such as CD, tape, FM, TV, stereo VCR, etc.

Pro Logic IIx GAME

This mode restores the impact low-frequency surround effects by routing them to the system’s subwoofer.

5.1ch + Pro Logic IIx Movie

This mode provides 7.1 channel surround sound from 5.1 channel sources movie soundtracks.

5.1ch + Pro Logic IIx Music

This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround sound from 5.1 channel sources music soundtracks.

Notes

• Pro Logic IIx mode will decode as Pro Logic II mode when the Surr. B is set to “None” from SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See page 27)

• Pro Logic IIx mode is available for a 2 channel input signal which is encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD or PCM format.

Pro Logic IIz Height

Dolby Pro Logic II z Height is designed to more effectively use existing program material when height channel speaker outputs are present. Dolby Pro Logic II z Height can be used to upmix a variety of sources from movies and music, but are particularly well-suited to upmix game content.

dts

dts, Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music This mode is for DTS-encoded source materials such as laserdisc, CD and DVD. Neo:6 is for some 2 channel sources.

dts

This mode is enabled when playing source materials encoded in dts multichannel. Playing multichannel encoded-5.1 channel dts sources provides ﬁ ve main audio channels (left, center, right, surround left and surround right) and a Low Frequency Effects channel. dts-ES decoding is not available in this mode. The DTS mode cannot be used when an analog input has been selected.

Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music

This mode decodes 2 channel signals into 6 channel signals using high-accuracy digital matrix technology. The DTS Neo:6 decoder has near-discrete properties in the frequency characteristics of the channels as well as in channel separation. According to the signals to be played back, DTS Neo:6 uses either the Neo:6 Cinema mode optimized for movie playback or the Neo:6 Music mode optimized for music playback.

Note

• The Neo:6 mode is available for 2 channel input signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD or PCM format.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERSOTHERS

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

OTHERS

ENGLISH

CIRCLE SURROUND II (CSII-CINEMA, CSII-MUSIC, CSII-MONO)

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

Circle Surround is designed to enable multichannel surround sound playback of non-encoded and multichannel encoded material.

BASIC

Backward compatibility provides listeners with up to 6.1 channels of surround performance from an entire collection of music and ﬁ lm, including broadcast, videotape and stereo recorded music. Depending on source material, you can select CSII- Cinema mode, CSII-Music mode or CSII-Mono mode.

BASIC

Note

• The CS II mode is available for 2 channel input signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD or PCM format.

ADVANCED

STEREO

This mode bypasses all surround processing. In stereo program sources, the left and right channels play normally when PCM audio or analog stereo is input. With Dolby Digital and DTS sources, the 5.1 channels are converted to two channel stereo. 96

SETUP

kHz PCM source material can be played back in stereo mode.

Dolby Virtual Speaker

OPERATION

Dolby Virtual Speaker technology uses proprietary

ADVANCED

technology of Dolby Laboratories to create a virtual surround sound ﬁ eld using only two speakers for the front channels, allowing the user to experience sound as if surround speakers were actually being used.

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERSOTHERS

MULTI CH. (MOVIE, MUSIC)

This mode is used to create a wider, deeper and more natural soundstage from two channel source material. This is done by feeding the left channel signal to both the left front and left surround speakers and the right channel signal to both the right front and right surround speakers. Additionally, the center channel reproduces a mix of the right and left channels.

Neural Surround

Neural SurroundTM represents the latest advancement in surround technology developed for music. Neural Surround frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to 7.1 multichannel surround playback.

employs psychoacoustic

CAUTION

Note for DTS

• To connected DVD player, laserdisc player or CD player needs to support DTS digital output. You may not be able to play some DTS source signals from certain CD players and LD players even if you connect the player to the unit digitally. This is because the digital signal has been processed (such as the output level, sampling frequency or frequency response), and the unit cannot recognize the signal as DTS data.

• Depending on the player used, DTS play may produce a short noise. This is not a malfunction.

• While signals from a DTS laserdisc or CD are playing in another surround mode, you cannot switch to digital input or from digital input to analog input from the INPUT SETUP in the MAIN MENU or by pressing the A/D button.

• You can not listen to DTS-encoded software in a multiroom.

• The outputs for VCR OUT, TAPE OUT and CD/CDR OUT output analog audio signals only. Do not record from CDs or LDs that support DTS using these outputs. If you do, the DTS-encoded signal will be recorded as noise.

Note or Dolby Digital Surround EX

• When playing Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded software in 6.1 channels, it is required to set the EX/ES mode.

• Note that some Dolby Digital Surround EXencoded software does not contain the identiﬁ cation signal. In this case, set the EX/ES mode manually.

Note for 96 kHz/192 kHz PCM audio

• The AUTO, Pure Direct, and Stereo modes can be used when playing PCM signals with a sampling frequency of 96/192 kHz (such as from DVDVideo/Audio discs).

• Certain DVD player models inhibit digital output. For details, refer to the player’s operation manual.

• Some DVD discs feature copy protection. When using such disc, 96 kHz PCM signal are not output from the DVD player. For details, refer to the player’s operation manual.

Note for HDCD

• HDCD is effective only through digital input.

• You may not be able to play some HDCD source signals from certain CD players if you connect the player to the unit digitally. This is because the digital signal has been processed (such as the output level, sampling frequency or frequency response) and the unit cannot recognize the signal as HDCD data.

DESCRIPTION

DTS Neural Surround has been chosen as the surround sound format for XM Satellite Radio’s “XM HD Surround, ” TV sports broadcasting, 7.1 games, Music Direct Internet streaming as well as leading FM/HD radio stations. It delivers the rich envelopment and discrete image detail of surround sound by unmasking the audio details, typically lost by other playback modes audiences will experience the deep ambience and subtle details of movies, music and games.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,003,467; 7,212,872 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, DTS Digital Surround, ES, and Neo:6 are registered trademarks and the DTS logos, Symbol and DTS 96/24 are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Note

• Audio is not output from the CENTER channel when using MULTI CH. MUSIC mode.

• dts Digital Surround

DTS was introduced in 1994 to provide 5.1 channels of discrete digital audio into home theater systems. DTS brings you premium quality discrete multichannel digital sound to both movies and music. DTS is a multichannel sound system designed to create full range digital sound reproduction. The no compromise DTS digital process sets the standard of quality for cinema sound by delivering an exact copy of the studio master recordings to neighborhood and home theaters. Now, every moviegoer can hear the sound exactly as the moviemaker intended. DTS can be enjoyed in the home for either movies or music on of DVD’s, LD’s, and CD’s.

• dts Neo:6

The advantages of discrete multichannel systems over matrix are well known. But even in homes equipped for discrete multichannel, there remains a need for high-quality matrix decoding. This is because of the large library of matrix surround motion pictures available on disc and on VHS tape; and analog television broadcasts. The typical matrix decoder of today derives a center channel and a mono surround channel from twochannel matrix stereo material. It is better than a simple matrix in that it includes steering logic to improve separation, but because of its mono, bandlimited surround it can be disappointing to users accustomed to discrete multichannel.

Neo:6 offers several important improvements as follow,

• Neo:6 provides up to six full-band channels of matrix decoding from stereo matrix material. Users with 6.1 and 5.1 systems will derive six and five separate channels, respectively, corresponding to the standard home-theater speaker layouts.

• Neo:6 technology allows various sound elements within a channel or channels to be steered separately, and in a way which follows naturally from the original presentation.

• Neo:6 offers a music mode to expand stereo nonmatrix recordings into the ﬁ ve- or six-channel layout, in a way which does not diminish the subtlety and integrity of the original stereo recording.

• dts Digital Surround ES

DTS-ES Extended Surround is a new multichannel digital signal format developed by Digital Theater Systems Inc. While offering high compatibility with the conventional DTS Digital Surround format, DTSES Extended Surround greatly improves the 360degree surround impression and space expression thanks to further expanded surround signals. This format has been used professionally in movie theaters since 1999. In addition to the 5.1 surround channels (FL, FR, C, SL, SR and LFE), DTS-ES Extended Surround also offers the SB (Surround Back) channel for surround playback with a total of 6.1 channels. DTS-ES Extended Surround includes two signal formats with different surround signal recording methods, as DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1.

• dts Digital Surround 96/24

The stereo CD is a 16-bit medium with sampling at

44.1 kHz. Professional audio has been 20- or 24-bit for some time, and there is increasing interest in higher sampling rates both for recording and for delivery into the home. Greater bit depths provide extended dynamic range. Higher sampling rates allow wider frequency response and the use of antialias and reconstruction ﬁ lters with more favorable aural characteristics.

DTS 96/24 allows for 5.1channel sound tracks to be encoded at a rate of 96kHz/24bits on DVD-Video titles. When DVD-video appeared, it became possible to deliver 24-bit, 96 kHz audio into the home, but only in two channels, and with serious limitations on picture. This capability has had little use. DVD-audio allows 96/24 in six channels, but a new player is needed, and only analog outputs are provided, necessitating the use of the D/A converters and analog electronics provided in the player.

DTS 96/24 offers the following:

1. Sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master.

2. Full backward compatibility with all existing decoders. (Existing decoders will output a 48 kHz signal)

3. No new player required: DTS 96/24 can be carried on DVD-video, or in the video zone of DVD-audio, accessible to all DVD players.

4. 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality fullmotion video, for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video.

DTS-HD Master Audio is capable of delivering audio that is a bit-for-bit identical to the studio master. DTS-HD Master Audio delivers audio at super high variable bit rates -24.5 mega-bits per second (Mbps) on Blu-ray discs and 18.0 Mbps on HD-DVD - that are signiﬁ cantly higher than standard DVDs . This bit stream is so “fast” and the transfer rate is so “high” that it can deliver the Holy Grail of audio: 7.1 audio channels at 96k sampling frequency/24 bit depths that are identical to the original. With DTS-HD Master Audio, you will be able to experience movies and music, exactly as the artist intended: clear, pure, and uncompromised.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380;5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535, 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can deliver up to 7.1 channels of sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio delivers audio at high constant bit rates superior to standard DVDs---6.0 Mbps on Blu-ray discs and 3.0 Mbps on HD-DVD to produce outstanding sound quality. It is capable of delivering up to 7.1 channels at 96k sampling frequency/24 bit depth resolution. It allows content creators to deliver rich, high deﬁ nition audio on movies where disc space may not allow for DTS-HD Master Audio.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535, 7,212,872; 7,333,929 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio and DTS-HD High Res Audio are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

ENGLISH

OTHERS

DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology supporting up to 5.1 channels with fixed data transfer rates. This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD DVD and secondary audio on Blu-ray Disc while boasting the potential applicability to upcoming broadcasts and memory audio contents.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535; 7,333,929 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark & the DTS logos, Symbol and DTS Express are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Dolby Digital identiﬁ es the use of Dolby Digital audio coding for such consumer formats as DVD and DTV. As with ﬁ lm sound, Dolby Digital can provide up to ﬁ ve full-range channels for left, center, and right screen channels, independent left and right surround channels, and a sixth (“.1”) channel for low-frequency effects.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is an improved matrix decoding technology that provides better spatiality and directionality on Dolby Surround program material; provides a convincing three-dimensional soundﬁ eld on conventional stereo music recordings; and is ideally suited to bring the surround experience to automotive sound. While conventional surround programming is fully compatible with Dolby Surround Pro Logic II decoders, soundtracks will be able to be encoded speciﬁ cally to take full advantage of Pro Logic II playback, including separate left and right surround channels. (Such material is also compatible with conventional Pro Logic decoders.)

Dolby Digital EX creates six full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives three surround channels from the two in the original recording. For best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movies soundtracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERSOTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

OTHERS

About Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology delivers a natural and immersing 7.1-channel listening experience to the home theater environment. A product of Dolby's expertise in surround sound and matrix decoding technologies, Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a

BASIC

complete surround sound solution that maximizes the entertainment experience from stereo as well as 5.1-channel encoded sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is fully compatible with Dolby Surround Pro Logic technology and can optimally decode the thousands of commercially available

BASIC

Dolby Surround encoded video cassettes and television programs with enhanced depth and spatiality. It can also process any high-quality stereo or Advanced Resolution 5.1-channel music content into a seamless 6.1- or 7.1-channel listening experience.

ADVANCED

Dolby Pro Logic II z Height is designed to more effectively use existing program material when height channel speaker outputs are present. Dolby

SETUP

Pro Logic II z Height can be used to upmix a variety of sources from movies and music, but are particularly well-suited to upmix game content.

ADVANCED

Dolby Virtual Speaker is a technologycertified by Dolby Laboratories that creates a virtualized surround sound experience from two speakers using a multichannel Dolby Digital source. Additionally, Dolby Virtual Speaker can simulate the surround sound effect produced by Dolby Pro Logic or Dolby Pro Logic II. Dolby Virtual Speaker retains all the original Multichannel audio information and provides the listener with the sensation of being surrounded by additional speakers.

Dolby® TrueHD is Dolby’s next-generation lossless technology developed for high-deﬁ nition disc-based media. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, unlocking the true high-definition entertainment experience on next-generation discs. When coupled with high-deﬁ nition video, Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented home theater experience that lets you enjoy sound as stunning as the high-deﬁ nition picture.

Circle Surround II ® (CS-II) is a powerful and versatile multichannel technology. CS-II is designed to enable up to 6.1 multichannel surround sound playback from mono, stereo, CS encoded sources and other matrix encoded sources. In all cases the decoder extends it into 6 channels of surround audio and a LFE/subwoofer signal. The CS-II decoder creates a listening environment that places the listener “inside” music performances and dramatically improves both hi-ﬁ audio conventional surroundencoded video material. CS-II provides composite stereo rear channels to greatly improve separation and image positioning– adding a heightened sense of realism to both audio and A/V productions. CS-II is packed with other useful feature like dialog clarity (SRS Dialog) for movies and cinema-like bass enrichment (TruBass). CS-II can enable the dialog to become clearer and more discernable in movies and it enables the bass frequencies contained in the original programming to more closely achieve low frequencies–overcoming the low frequency limitations of the speakers by full octave.

Circle Surround II , SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. Circle Surround II technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.

HDCD® (High Definition Compatible Digital®) is a patented process for delivering on Compact Disc the full richness and details of the original microphone feed. HDCD encoded CDs sound better because they are encoded with 20-bits of real musical information as compared to 16-bits for all other CDs. HDCD overcomes the limitation of the 16-bit CD format by using a sophisticated system to encode the additional four bits onto the CD while remaining completely compatible with the CD format. When listening to HDCD recordings, you hear more dynamic range, a focused 3-D sound stage, and extremely natural vocal and musical timbre. With HDCD, you get the body, depth and emotion of the original performance not a ﬂ at, digital imitation. HDCD system manufactured under license from Microsoft. This product is covered by one or more of the following: In the United States 5,479,168 5,638,074 5,640,161 5,808,574 5,838,274 5,854,600 5,864,311 5,872,531 and in Australia 669,114 with other patents pending.

HDMI, the and High-Deﬁ nition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

The Dolby Headphone technology provides a surround sound listening experience over headphones. When listening to multichannel content such as DVD

TROUBLESHOOTING

movies over headphones, the listening experience is fundamentally different than listening to speakers. Since the headphone speaker drivers are covering the pinna of the ear, the listening experience differs greatly from traditional speaker playback. Dolby utilizes patented headphone perspective curves to solve this problem and provides a non-fatiguing, immersive, home theater listening experience. Dolby Headphone also delivers exceptional 3D

OTHERSOTHERS

audio from stereo material.

Dolby Digital Plus is a highly sophisticated and versatile audio codec based on Dolby Digital and designed specifically to adapt to the changing demands of future audio, video delivery, and audio storage systems while simultaneously retaining backwards compatibility with the existing Dolby Digital 5.1-channel home theater systems in use today.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Macrovision

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

MultEQ

Audyssey MultEQ is a room equalization solution that calibrates any audio system so that it can achieve optimum performance for every listener in a large listening area. MultEQ captures acoustical information at multiple locations throughout a listening area in both the time and frequency domains. It uses a sophisticated clustering algorithm to combine this information so that acoustical problems are accurately analyzed. Based on these measurements, MultEQ calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both time and frequency response problems in the listening area and also performs a fully automated surround system setup. The result is clear, well-balanced sound for every listener.

Dynamic EQ

Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics. Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency response and surround levels momentby-moment at any userselected volume setting. The result is bass response, tonal balance and surround impression that remain constant despite changes in volume. Dynamic EQ combines information from incoming source levels with actual output sound levels in the room, a prerequisite for delivering a loudness correction solution. Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ to provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.

Dynamic Volume

Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud passages of movies. Dynamic Volume looks at the preferred volume setting by the user and then monitors how the volume of program material is being perceived by listeners in real time to decide whether an adjustment is needed. Whenever necessary, Dynamic Volume makes the necessary rapid or gradual adjustments to maintain the desired playback volume level while

optimizing the dynamic range. Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog clarity remain the same whether watching movies, flipping between television channels, or changing from stereo to surround sound content.

Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories. U.S. and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ and Audyssey Dynamic EQ™ are registered trademark of Audyssey Laboratories.

• ”Made for iPod” means that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.

“Works with iPhone” means that an electronic

accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPhone and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of

this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc. registered in the US and other countries. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.

, Audyssey Dynamic Volume™,

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FM TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range .....................87.5 – 108.0 MHz

Usable Sensitivity ................IHF 1.8 μV/16.4 dBf

Signal to Noise Ratio ......Mono/Stereo 75/70 dB

Distortion ........................ Mono/Stereo 0.2/0.3 %

Stereo Separation ............................. 1 kHz 45 dB

Alternate Channel Selectivity ...± 300 kHz 60 dB

Image Rejection ............................ 98 MHz 70 dB

Tuner Output Level

....................1 kHz, ± 40 kHz Dev 500 mV

AM TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range .........................531 – 1602 kHz

Signal to Noise Ratio .................................. 50 dB

Usable Sensitivity ........................Loop 400μV/m

Distortion ...................... 400Hz, 30 % Mod. 0.5 %

Selectivity .....................................± 18 kHz 70 dB

AUDIO SECTION

Power Output (20 Hz – 20 kHz/THD=0.08%)

(SR6004)

Front L&R ..............................8 ohms 110 W / Ch

Center ....................................8 ohms 110 W / Ch

Surround L&R .......................8 ohms 110 W / Ch

Surround Back L&R ..............8 ohms 110 W / Ch

Front L&R ..............................6 ohms 130 W / Ch

Center ....................................6 ohms 130 W / Ch

Surround L&R .......................6 ohms 130 W / Ch

Surround Back L&R ..............6 ohms 130 W / Ch

(SR5004)

Front L&R ..............................8 ohms 100 W / Ch

Center ....................................8 ohms 100 W / Ch

Surround L&R .......................8 ohms 100 W / Ch

Surround Back L&R ..............8 ohms 100 W / Ch

Front L&R ..............................6 ohms 120 W / Ch

Center ....................................6 ohms 120 W / Ch

Surround L&R .......................6 ohms 120 W / Ch

Surround Back L&R ..............6 ohms 120 W / Ch

ENGLISH

OTHERS

Input Sensitivity/Impedance

...................................180 mV/ 47 Kohms

Signal to Noise Ratio(Analog Input / Pure Direct)

.......................................................105 dB

Frequency Response

(Analog Input / Pure Direct)

.............................8 Hz – 100 kHz (± 3 dB)

(Digital Input / 96 kHz PCM)

...............................8 Hz – 45 kHz (± 3 dB)

VIDEO

Television Format ............................... NTSC/PAL

Input Level/Impedance ..............1 Vp-p/75 ohms

Output Level/Impedance ...........1 Vp-p/75 ohms

Video Frequency Response

..............................5 Hz to 8 MHz (– 1 dB)

Video Frequency (Component)

............................5 Hz to 80 MHz (– 1 dB)

S/N .............................................................60 dB

HDMI

Input / Output jacks ........ 19-pin HDMI terminals

(HDMI V.1.3 with Deep

Color, Dolby True HD, DTS-HD Master Audio, SACD, DVD-Audio)

GENERAL

Power Requirement ............... AC 230 V 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption .................................. 650 W

Standby Power Consumption ....(Normal) 0.7 W

......................................(Economy) 0.4 W

Weight ...................................... (SR6004) 12.7 kg

...................................... (SR5004) 12.7 kg

Specifications subject to change without prior notice.

FUNCTIONS

NAMES AND

BASIC

CONNECTIONS

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERSOTHERS

NAMES AND

FUNCTIONS

OTHERS

ENGLISH

Recording and playback of any material may

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

CONNECTIONS

OPERATION

require consent. For further information refer to the following:

BASIC

— Copyright Act 1956 — Dramatic and Musical Performers Act 1958 — Performers Protection Acts 1963 and 1972 — Any subsequent statutory enactments and

orders

BASIC

ADVANCED

SETUP

ADVANCED

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERSOTHERS

CLEANING OF EQUIPMENT EXTERNAL SURFACES

The exterior ﬁ nish of your unit will last indeﬁ nitely with proper care and cleaning, Never use scouring pads, steel wool, scourging powders or harsh chemical agents (e.g., lye solution), alcohol, thinner, benzine, insecticide or other volatile substances as these wil mar the ﬁ nish of the equipment. Likewise, never use cloths containing chemical substances. If the equipment get dirty, wipe the external surfaces with a soft, lint-free cloth. If the equipment becomes heavily soiled:

• dilute some washing up liquid in water, in a ratio of one part detergent to six parts water.

• dip a soft, lint free in the solution and wring the it is damp.

• wipe the equipment with the damp cloth.

• dry the equipment by wiping it with a dry cloth.

REPAIRS

Only the most competent and qualiﬁ ed service technicians should be allowed to service the factory-trained warranty station personnel have the knowledge and special facilities needed for repair and calibration of this precision equipment. After the warranty period has expired, repairs will be performed for a charge if the equipment can be returned to normal operation. In the event of difﬁ culty, refer to your dealer or write directly to the nearest location to you that is listed on the Marantz Authorized Service Station list. If writing, please include the model and serial number of the equipment together with a full description of what you think is abnormal about the equipment’s behaviour.

SETUP CODES

Denon ........................................................... 5034, 5035, 5036

Hitachi .......................................................... 5031, 5032, 5033

Integra.............................................................................. 5013

JVC .................................5014, 5015, 5017, 5018, 5019, 5020

LG ............................................................................ 5010, 5011

Marantz........................................................ 5000, 5026, 5027

Mitsubishi .............................................................. 5024, 5025

Onkyo ............................................................................... 5013

Panasonic.................................................... 5001, 5002, 5003

Philips............................................................................... 5004

Pioneer............................................................................. 5005

RCA ................................................................................... 5012

Samsung .......................................................................... 5005

Sharp ............................................................ 5028, 5029, 5030

Sony.................................................... 5007, 5008, 5009, 5016

Toshiba ............................................................................. 5012

Yamaha ........................................................ 5021, 5022, 5023

DVD

Aiwa ....................................................................... 2036, 2037

Apex ...............................2012, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2021, 2034

BOSE ............................................................2038, 2039, 2063

Denon ..................................................................... 2047, 2048

Funai ................................................................................. 2049

GE........................................................ 2009, 2020, 2029, 2033

Harman Kardon ..............................................................2061

Hitachi .......................................................... 2008, 2012, 2031

JVC .................................2006, 2010, 2040, 2041, 2042, 2043

Kenwood................................................................ 2053, 2054

Koss .................................................................................. 2058

Magnavox.......................................... 2007, 2011, 2023, 2025

Marantz.................................................................. 2025, 2065

Marantz (Blu-ray) ...........................................................2064

Mitsubishi .............................................................. 2011, 2015

Onkyo ............................................................................... 2062

Oritron .................................................................... 2009, 2030

Panasonic.......................................... 2003, 2015, 2016, 2055

Philips........................................................... 2007, 2011, 2058

Pioneer......................................................... 2002, 2014, 2056

Proscan........................................................ 2009, 2020, 2032

RCA ........................................... 2005, 2009, 2020, 2035, 2057

Sampo .............................................................................. 2041

Samsung ..................................2008, 2012, 2022, 2024, 2027

Sanyo ..................................................................... 2050, 2052

Sharp ...................................................................... 2044, 2045

Sherwood ........................................................................ 2051

Sony.............................................................. 2001, 2013, 2059

Toshiba ............................................... 2004, 2008, 2026, 2028

Yamaha .................................................................. 2046, 2060

Zenith ............................................................................... 2010

DSS

Alphastar ......................................................................... 4027

Amstrad .......................................................4046, 4047, 4050

Atsky................................................................................. 4048

B Sky B......................................................... 4021, 4045, 4046

Chaparral ......................................................................... 4039

DIRECTV....................................................... 4001, 4016, 4044

DISH Network .................................................................4030

Drake ................................................................................ 4026

Echostar..... 4007, 4017, 4018, 4019, 4020, 4062, 4063, 4064

Eurosky .................................................................. 4047, 4056

Express Vu ....................................................................... 4017

Foxtel ................................................................................ 4051

Freesat ............................................................................. 4056

Fujitsu ............................................................................... 4025

GE.................................................................. 4002, 4008, 4009

General Instruments ............................................4036, 4037

Gradiente ............................................................... 4044, 4057

Hitachi .................................................................... 4001, 4015

Hughes ................................................................... 4001, 4016

Humax ...................................... 4049, 4050, 4051, 4052, 4053

Janeil................................................................................ 4025

JVC ................................................................................... 4017

Mitsubishi ........................................................................ 4001

Nokia .................................................. 4058, 4059, 4060, 4061

Optima .............................................................................. 4048

Panasonic.............................................................. 4004, 4010

Philips................................................. 4031, 4035, 4044, 4057

Proscan.............................................. 4002, 4008, 4009, 4011

Radio Shack .......................................................... 4036, 4037

RCA ..................................................... 4002, 4008, 4009, 4029

Realistic ........................................................................... 4040

Rural Cable ......................................................................4036

Samsung ..............4022, 4027, 4042, 4043, 4050, 4054, 4055

Schneider .............................................................. 4041, 4043

SKY ...............................................................4044, 4045, 4057

Skyplus............................................................................. 4048

Skysat........................................................... 4041, 4047, 4056

Sony................................ 4003, 4012, 4014, 4065, 4066, 4067

Star Choice...................................................................... 4032

Star Trak .......................................................................... 4024

STS ................................................................................... 4038

SuperDish ........................................................................ 4028

Teac .................................................................................. 4049

Thomson ................................................................ 4046, 4056

Toshiba ................................................................... 4001, 4034

Uniden .......................................................... 4005, 4006, 4013

Universum ....................................................................... 4056

Video Pall ......................................................................... 4025

Zenith ...........................................................4023, 4025, 4033

Acer .................................................................................. 1141

Admiral......................................................... 1002, 1009, 1089

Aiko................................................................................... 1059

Aiwa ....................................................................... 1117, 1118

Akai................................................................................... 1001

Amtron ............................................................................. 1023

Anam ................................................................................ 1113

Anam National ............................................1023, 1069, 1092

AOC..................................................... 1003, 1024, 1049, 1127

Audiovox .......................................................................... 1023

Bell & Howell ........................................................ 1009, 1025

Benq ....................................................................... 1104, 1142

Broksonic ..........................................1003, 1097, 1098, 1113

Celebrity........................................................................... 1001

Citizen............................. 1003, 1013, 1023, 1026, 1059, 1063

Colortyme .............................................................. 1003, 1043

Contec .............................................................................. 1113

Contec/Cony................................................ 1023, 1045, 1047

Craig ................................................... 1020, 1022, 1023, 1113

Crown ..................................................................... 1023, 1067

Curtis Mathes .....1003, 1013, 1025, 1026, 1062, 1103, 1110

Daewoo...... 1003, 1013, 1024, 1035, 1036, 1059, 1084, 1101

Daytron ........................................................1003, 1013, 1016

Dimensia ................................................................ 1103, 1110

Dumont......................................................... 1003, 1010, 1153

Electroband ..................................................................... 1001

Electrohome ......................................1001, 1003, 1069, 1133

Emerson ..... 1003, 1013, 1015, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023, 1025

1038, 1044, 1045, 1048, 1055, 1061, 1094, 1096 1099, 1101, 1113

Envision............................................................................ 1003

Fisher.................................................. 1025, 1051, 1091, 1160

Fujitsu ................................................. 1038, 1124, 1125, 1155

Funai ............................................................. 1023, 1038, 1113

Gateway........................................................................... 1150

GE................ 1003, 1018, 1022, 1046, 1054, 1069, 1085, 1103

1110, 1113, 1133, 1136, 1153

Goldstar ...............1003, 1013, 1024, 1030, 1045, 1080,1100

1112, 1154

Hallmark........................................................................... 1003

Hisense ............................................................................ 1116

Hitachi .................. 1003, 1012, 1031, 1032, 1037, 1041, 1045

1047, 1065, 1068, 1082, 1088, 1094, 1139 1140, 1145, 1159

Inﬁ nity ..............................................................................1067

Janeil................................................................................ 1134

JBL.................................................................................... 1067

JC Penney ...........1003, 1013, 1018, 1019, 1024, 1026, 1046

1047, 1054, 1063, 1083, 1085, 1100, 1103 1110, 1112, 1133, 1154

Jensen ............................................................................. 1003

JVC .......................1028, 1029, 1045, 1047, 1050, 1060, 1065

Kawasho ................................................................ 1001, 1003

Kenwood.......................................................................... 1003

Kloss Novabeam ..............................1023, 1056, 1057, 1134

KTV .......................1013, 1023, 1033, 1034, 1073, 1099, 1113

LG ............................................................................ 1024, 1030

M.Wards ...................................................... 1002, 1009, 1038

Magnavox................................ 1003, 1052, 1053, 1056, 1057

1063, 1067, 1081, 1106

Marantz.............................................. 1003, 1031, 1067, 1122

Mitsubishi ...................... 1003, 1024, 1051, 1115, 1122, 1133

Motorola ................................................................ 1014, 1069

NEC ........................................... 1003, 1012, 1024, 1043, 1069

NET-TV ................................................................... 1137, 1150

Orion ....................................................................... 1020, 1096

Panasonic................................ 1017, 1067, 1069, 1095, 1111

Philips......... 1003, 1011, 1045, 1052, 1054, 1056, 1057, 1058

1063, 1067, 1069, 1106

Pioneer........................... 1003, 1018, 1037, 1070, 1071, 1094

1145, 1147, 1149

Plasmsync ....................................................................... 1135

Portland .............................................1003, 1013, 1024, 1059

Price Club ........................................................................ 1026

Prism ................................................................................ 1018

Proscan...... 1004, 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1085, 1103, 1110

Proton..................................................................... 1003, 1045

Quasar...................................... 1010, 1069, 1073, 1111, 1153

Radio Shack ........ 1003, 1013, 1015, 1023, 1024, 1025, 1045

1100, 1103, 1110, 1113

RCA ............. 1003, 1004, 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1014, 1024

1049, 1069, 1075, 1079, 1085, 1087, 1088, 1093 1094, 1101, 1103, 1110, 1113, 1153

Realistic ..... 1013, 1015, 1023, 1025, 1045, 1100, 1103, 1110

Runco ..................................................................... 1010, 1153

Sampo .............................................................................. 1150

Samsung ....1003, 1013, 1024, 1026, 1040, 1045, 1062, 1078

1083, 1090, 1100, 1105, 1114, 1120, 1121, 1146 1148, 1157

Sansui .............................................................................. 1119

Sanyo .....

1003, 1025, 1051, 1072, 1077, 1091, 1156, 1157, 1158

Sharp .......... 1003, 1013, 1014, 1015, 1045, 1055, 1064, 1066

1076, 1089, 1123

Signature ......................................................................... 1009

Sony.............................................................. 1001, 1102, 1108

Soundesign .............................1003, 1023, 1038, 1063, 1113

Starlite.............................................................................. 1023

Supre-Macy .................................................................... 1134

Sylvania .....1003, 1039, 1042, 1052, 1053, 1056, 1057, 1063

1067, 1089, 1151

Symphonic................................................... 1023, 1039, 1044

Tandy ................................................................................ 1014

Tatung ..............................................................................1069

Technics ..........................................................................1018

Techwood .............................................................. 1003, 1018

Teknika ....... 1003, 1009, 1013, 1023, 1024, 1026, 1038, 1045

1047, 1059, 1063, 1111, 1113

Telecaption ...................................................................... 1074

Toshiba ....... 1003, 1019, 1025, 1026, 1042, 1074, 1098, 1107

1111, 1135, 1136

Totevision ........................................................................ 1013

Universal................................................................ 1046, 1054

Video Concepts ..............................................................1113

Viewsonic ............1006, 1022, 1109, 1128, 1129, 1130, 1131

1138, 1143, 1145, 1150

Wards ......... 1003, 1009, 1015, 1024, 1038, 1044, 1046, 1052

1054, 1056, 1057, 1067, 1086, 1103, 1110

White Westinghouse ...........................................1001, 1101

Yamaha .................................................................. 1003, 1024

Zenith .............................1003, 1009, 1010, 1132, 1144, 1153

AIWA ............................................................ 3001, 3002, 3003

AKAI .............................................................3004, 3005, 3006

AUDIO .............................................................................3007

AUDIO LABS ...................................................................3008

CALIFORNIA .................................................................... 3008

CARVER........................................................ 3010, 3011, 3009

CASIO ..................................................................... 3012, 3020

CURTIS ................................................................... 3020, 3012

DENON ............................................................................. 3013

EMERSON........................................................................ 3014

FISHER .....................................3011, 3015, 3016, 3017, 3018

GE...................................................................................... 3019

GENEXXA..................................................... 3014, 3021, 3020

HARMON ..................................................... 3022, 3023, 3051

HITACHI ...........................................................................3020

INKEL................................................................................ 3024

JC PENNEY.................................................. 3012, 3020, 3025

JVC ......................................................................... 3026, 3027

KARDON ......................................................3022, 3051, 3023

KENWOOD..................... 3028, 3029, 3030, 3031, 3032, 3033

KRELL ............................................................................... 3010

LUXMAN ............................................3035, 3036, 3037, 3038

LX I ................................................................ 3012, 3020, 3014

MAGNAVOX ................................................3010, 3039, 3040

MARANTZ .........................................3010, 3041, 3042, 3043

MATHES ................................................................. 3012, 3020

MCS ........................................................................ 3012, 3020

MGA ................................................................................. 3023

MISSION.......................................................................... 3010

MITSUBISHI.......................................................... 3023, 3044

NAD ........................................................................ 3034, 3045

NAKAMICHI ................................................ 3046, 3047, 3048

NEC MCS ......................................................................... 3025

NIKKO..................................................................... 3007, 3016

ONKYO ...............................................3049, 3050, 3051, 3052

3055, 3102, 3103

OPTIMUS .............3011, 3014, 3020, 3028, 3053, 3054, 3056

3057, 3058, 3059

PANASONIC ................................................ 3008, 3060, 3061

PHILIPS ..............................................3009, 3010, 3010, 3040

PIONEER .................................. 3020, 3021, 3062, 3063, 3064

QUASAR........................................................................... 3008

RCA ....................... 3011, 3014, 3065, 3066, 3067, 3068, 3069

REALISTIC .....................3011, 3014, 3020, 3042, 3054, 3057

ROTEL ............................................................................... 3010

RS ORIGINAL ..................................................................3070

SAE ......................................................................... 3010, 3083

SAMSUNG....................................................................... 3071

SANSUI ..............................................3014, 3068, 3072, 3073

SANYO .....................................3011, 3018, 3074, 3075, 3076

SCOTT .............................................................................. 3014

SEARS ...................................... 3012, 3014, 3020, 3028, 3042

SHARP.......................................................... 3028, 3042, 3077

SHERWOOD ............................3042, 3056, 3070, 3078, 3024

SHURE .............................................................................. 3025

SONY .................... 3039, 3079, 3080, 3081, 3082, 3097, 3098

3099, 3100, 3101

SYLVANIA ........................................................................ 3010

SYMPHONIC ................................................................... 3083

TEAC ..................... 3016, 3042, 3057, 3083, 3084, 3085, 3086

TECHNICA ...............................3007, 3008, 3061, 3087, 3088

THETA DIGITAL ............................................................... 3040

TOSHIBA.......................................................................... 3045

VICTOR ............................................................................. 3026

YAMAHA .................................. 3007, 3089, 3090, 3091, 3092

ZENITH .....................................3016, 3093, 3094, 3095, 3096

DIMENSIONS

Unit : mm (in)

SR5004SR6004

440 (17-3/8)

22.5 (15/16)

389 (15-3/8)

348.5 (13-11/16)

17.5 (11/16)

161 (6-3/8)

146.5 (5-3/4)

14.5

(5/8)

440 (17-3/8)

22.5 (15/16)

389 (15-3/8)

348.5 (13-11/16)

17.5 (11/16)

161 (6-3/8)

146.5 (5-3/4)

14.5

(5/8)

www.marantz.com

You can find your nearest authorized distributor or dealer on our website.

is a registered trademark.

Printed in China 07/2009 541110361035M mzh-d

Marantz SR5004 user guide

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual